JP6864233B2 - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium.

Generally, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a main control board that controls a game and a sub-control board that performs control processing based on a command (directive control command) from the main control board. Among these, as the sub-control board, a payout control board, an effect control board, various display control boards, an illumination control board, an acoustic control board, and the like can be exemplified. Further, in some pachinko gaming machines, the main control board transmits a command for a customer waiting demo when the launch handle is not operated for a predetermined time or longer (paragraph 0181 of Patent Document 1, etc.). Further, in paragraph 0055 of Patent Document 2, it is described that the number of players is counted based on the touch signal related to the firing handle and the fluctuation state of the decorative pattern (the state of the production by the moving image).
Japanese Patent No. 5991760 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-244761

By the way, in pachinko gaming machines, the use of operation detection (also referred to as "touch detection") related to the launch handle is very limited as disclosed in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 described above. It has become. It is considered that this is because the degree of attention to touch detection is low and few people are aware of the possibility of touch detection. Gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines are required to have game characteristics and a variety of selections, but we believe that the variety of gaming machines can be further improved by examining various control modes starting from steering wheel operation detection. Be done.

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the variety of gaming machines, and in particular, to more effectively utilize the operation detection of a player by a launching handle or the like. Is to provide a pachinko game machine that can be used.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention launches a game ball into the game area, and the game ball enters the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. Pachinko is a pachinko game in which a symbol (special symbol, etc.) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed as a symbol game, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a profit to the player is performed. It ’s a game machine,
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game including the symbol game, and
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Touch detection means (touch switch, etc.) that detects the player's contact,
It is equipped with a rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) that detects the rotation operation of the player.
Some of the effects are output (touch effect, etc.) triggered by touch detection, which is the detection of the player's contact by the touch detection means.
As the state of the pachinko game machine, a game standby state (“B1: game standby state (normal demo display)” or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed, and the symbol game It has a game executing state (“B2: game in progress”, etc.) in which any of the special games is being executed.
In the game standby state, there are a plurality of types of game standby states in which the output contents of the effects produced by the sub-control means are different (“B11: game standby A (normal demo display)” to “B14: game standby (power saving)”, etc.). Including
Whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection, depending on which of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state. Is configured to be different,
As the starting winning opening, a first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening are provided.
An opening / closing member is attached to the second starting winning opening.
An operating port into which a game ball can enter is provided in the game area.
The opening / closing member is driven when the game ball enters the operating opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening.
In a situation where the power is restored while the touch detection means is being contacted before the power is turned on, the effect triggered by the touch detection is not output.
If a game ball enters the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening during the output of the effect triggered by the touch detection, the effect triggered by the touch detection during output is interrupted. Even if the game ball enters the operating port, the effect triggered by the touch detection during output is continued without interruption.
After the effect triggered by the touch detection is executed, the execution of the effect triggered by the touch detection is prohibited until the time counting of the predetermined time is completed after the touch detection is canceled.
In a situation where the effect triggered by the touch detection based on the touch detection is executed and the touch detection is continued, the effect triggered by the touch detection is newly performed based on the continuous touch detection. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by not being executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the variety of gaming machines and more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the launch handle.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of one Example of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the function of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the main board structure of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a front view showing a substrate case in a state where the main substrate is housed, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view schematically showing a portion along the line AA in (a). It is a block diagram which shows the basic functional means of a main board, a sub-main board, and a sub-sub board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main symbol display board of the main control display device. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example while the effect symbol is changing in the effect display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example while the effect symbol is also stopped. (A) is a chart showing a hit / fail determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table for removal. (A) shows a chart showing a big hit symbol judgment table for the first lottery, (b) shows a chart showing a big hit symbol judgment table for the second lottery, and (c) shows a small hit symbol judgment table used at the time of a small hit. The chart, (d) is a chart showing the missed symbol determination table used at the time of slipping. A chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a miss, (b) is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a 15R jackpot, and (c) is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a 5R jackpot. Is a chart showing the winning value and the payout rate for each set value. (A) is a chart showing a look-ahead determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a look-ahead code correspondence table. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power-on in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the game progress interrupt processing in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery determination process in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process in a main board. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state before the handle is operated, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state at the time of the handle operation. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the operation button, the cross key, and their periphery from the front upper side. It is a figure which shows the control element which concerns on touch detection. It is a figure which shows the control element which follows FIG. (A) is a chart showing the pros and cons of executing the effect according to the state of the gaming machine, and (b) is a chart showing the pros and cons of executing the effect following (a). It is a chart which shows the production type for each state of a game machine. Following with FIG. 25, it is a chart which shows the effect type. (A) is a chart showing the effect regulation related to the second and subsequent touch detections, and (b) is a chart showing the effect regulation following (a). It is a timing chart which shows the production output example at the time of setting change. It is a timing chart which shows the production output example at the time of environment setting. It is a timing chart which shows the production output example at the time of reach display. It is a timing chart which shows the production output example at the time of the big hit end demo display. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of the effect output when the power is cut off during the game standby, and (b) is an example of the effect output when the power is cut off while the symbol is changing. It is a timing chart showing. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the standby screen A, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the standby screen B, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a display screen C (environment setting screen). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect output at the time of touch detection in the standby screen A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect output at the time of touch detection while the fluctuation is stopped. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the energization return screen in the standby screen A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the energization return screen during the symbol variation. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an abnormality display related to a door opening error, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting change screen A, and (b) shows an example of a setting changing screen at the time of standby screen B. It is explanatory drawing. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal reach screen, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an SP reach screen, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot end demo screen. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit start demo screen, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen during a round, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hit-time specific effect screen. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hitting specific effect screen different from FIG. 38 (c), (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an inter-round effect screen, and (c) is a hit different from (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the medium specific effect screen. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode before touch effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode at the time of touch effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effect output before touch notice, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effect output after touch notice. (A) is a chart showing a selection table of a notice group related to a change before touch, (b) is a chart showing a selection table of a notice group related to a change of touch transition, and (c) is a look-ahead notice of a change before touch. The chart showing the selection table of (d) is a chart showing the selection table of the look-ahead notice related to the fluctuation of the touch transition.

Hereinafter, examples of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described, and then, the gaming procedure, the effect, the control mode, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
<Basic configuration of pachinko game machines>

FIG. 1 shows the front configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, the gaming board 50 is mounted on the gaming machine frame 11, which will be described later. Of these, the gaming board 50 has different components such as accessories and designs depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Further, the gaming board 50 can be separated from the gaming machine frame 11 by canceling the electrical connection relationship and the structural connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11.

Further, by sharing the structural and electrical connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11 for the gaming boards 50 of a plurality of models, it is possible to change the so-called model in which the gaming machine frame 11 is shared between different models. There is. In the following, the gaming machine frame 11 will be described first, and then the board surface configuration of the gaming board 50 will be described.

The above-mentioned gaming machine frame 11 has an outer frame 12, a front frame (also referred to as “inner frame” or “main body frame”) 13, and a lower front plate (also referred to as “curtain plate”) 14. .. Further, a glass door 15 and a dish unit 16 are mounted on the front frame 13. Of these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame used for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 10 to a predetermined position in the island equipment in the game hall (game store), and as shown in FIG. 1, glass. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the dish unit 16 and the lower front plate 14 described above have an opening portion in which the front side is closed.

In addition, nailing is generally performed as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island equipment. Then, wood is used as the material of at least the portion of the outer frame 12 for fixing to the island equipment. Instead of wood, for example, a plastic material that can be nailed can be used. Further, as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island equipment, it is also possible to adopt a construction method other than nailing.

The front frame 13 has a structure having an outer shape that matches the opening portion of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via the hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. Then, the front frame 13 is opened from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 by swinging forward with the left edge portion in FIG. 1 as the fixed end and the right edge portion as the free end. Further, the front frame 13 swings backward from the open state, enters the outer frame 12 and locks, so that the front frame 13 is closed again. When the front frame 13 is closed, the front frame 13 closes the portion between the upper and short portions of the outer frame 12 and the lower front plate 14 described above.

The front frame 13 is locked to the outer frame 12 and released from the outer frame 12 via a locking device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, a cylinder portion 17 of the locking device is arranged in a portion below the free end side of the front frame 13, and the cylinder portion 17 covers the lower portion of the front frame 13. The keyhole is directed to the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through the plate unit 16 described above. Then, when the amusement park clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key counterclockwise, for example, the free end side of the front frame 13 is released from the lock device, and the front frame 13 is opened. Become.

With respect to such a front frame 13, the above-mentioned lower front plate 14 does not have a structure for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

The glass door 15 arranged at the front portion of the front frame 13 and the dish unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 can swing independently with the left edge portion in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge portion as a free end. Then, the glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 are opened by, for example, a game hall clerk who swings horizontally forward, and swings horizontally backward from the open state to lock the glass door 15 and the plate unit 16. As a result, it becomes closed.

The glass door 15 is locked to the front frame 13 and released from the front frame 13 via the above-mentioned locking device (not shown). That is, when the amusement park clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 described above and turns the key clockwise, for example, in the direction opposite to that when the front frame 13 is opened, the free end side of the glass door 15 is locked. The glass door 15 is opened. Then, the glass door 15 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13, and the glass door 15 is pushed so as to be parallel to the front frame 13, so that the locking device is activated and the glass door 15 is moved forward again. Locks to the frame 13.

Further, by opening the glass door 15, a locking mechanism (not shown) of the dish unit 16 appears and can be operated, and a game hall clerk moves the operating portion (not shown) of the locking mechanism downward, for example. By the pushing operation, the dish unit 16 is opened. Further, the dish unit 16 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13, and the dish unit 16 is pushed so as to be parallel to the front frame 13, so that the locking mechanism is activated and the dish unit 16 is reopened. Locks to the front frame 13.

Further, the glass door 15 holds, for example, two parallel transparent plates detachably, and when the glass door 15 is in a closed state, the gaming board 50 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through these transparent plates. I am trying to do it. As the transparent plate, a transparent resin plate or the like can be used in addition to the glass plate. Further, by opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held by the front frame 13 by the game board holding mechanism (not shown) is exposed. Further, although not shown, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage for guiding and collecting the game ball, which is a game medium.

The plate unit 16 has an upper ball plate 18, a lower ball plate 19, a launch handle 20, and the like on the front surface thereof. Of these, the upper ball plate 18 stores the game balls, supplies the game balls to the launching device 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated via the launch handle 20, and plays games on the lower ball plate 19. It is equipped with mechanisms for various functions such as ejecting balls. Further, the lower ball plate 19 stores the game balls, receives the game balls sent from the upper ball plate 18, and puts the game balls into a ball box (so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. It is equipped with a mechanism for various functions such as discharge. In some cases, the ball box is integrally provided with the island equipment.

Further, in the present embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided in parts such as the upper corner of the glass door 15 and the lower front plate 14, and through these speakers 21, depending on the game state, the effect pattern, and the like. BGM and various sound effects are output.

Further, an operation button 22 that can be operated by the player is provided on the portion of the upper ball plate 18 that faces the player. The operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper part of the upper ball plate 18, and is located near the center of the upper ball plate 18 in the left-right direction. Further, the operation button 22 is provided with a light emitting body for the operation button (not shown) inside, and outputs light according to the effect pattern to be executed.

The operation button 22 may be projected upward in a predetermined case by using a drive source such as a motor. Although not shown in detail, the operation button 22 in the present embodiment may be displaced so that the tip of the operation button 22 protrudes upward due to the drive of the elevating motor to form an operation lever input portion capable of performing input by tilting. It is possible and has a crescent-shaped eccentric cam to generate vibration in the drive system of the operating lever.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a cross key 96 is provided in addition to the operation button 22, and the player can set various environments by using the cross key 96. As the contents of the environment setting, the volume adjustment of the speaker 21, the brightness adjustment and the light amount adjustment of the effect display described later, the change of the effect mode described later, and the like can be exemplified. Further, the gaming machine frame 11, for example, the front frame 13 or the like, can be provided with a display capable of performing an effect related to the game and a display related to the above-mentioned environment setting.

Further, in addition to the cross key, for example, a lever-shaped operating means, various types of touch panels, and the like can be used. Further, in FIG. 21, reference numeral 97 is a ball lending button, and reference numeral 98 is a return button. Further, reference numeral 98 in FIG. 21 is a ball removal button for the upper ball plate 18.
<Back configuration of pachinko machine>

Next, the basic configuration on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the back surface of the front frame 13 is provided with a game ball passage for guiding or collecting the game ball, and a set base (also referred to as a “back set board”) 31 serving as a prize ball path forming mechanism. Is attached, and below this set board 31, a power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the entire gaming machine and a payout control (also referred to as "prize ball control") board for controlling the gaming machine frame side. Each of the 103 is attached in a special transparent case. Further, on the back side of the game board 50, the main board (main control board) 102 that controls the entire game and the sub board 104 that executes the effect control based on the control command from the main board 102 are dedicated to each. It is housed in a transparent case and is provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the opening of the set base 31. Further, the set base 31 also includes a launching device 43 and a launching control board 105 that controls the launching device 43.

In the set base 31, the prize ball tank 33 is provided above the above-mentioned opening. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls supplied from the island equipment and used as prize balls. Further, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided. The prize ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the prize ball discharge passage 36 are arranged along the right side from above the game board 50 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Has been done.

The prize ball passage 34 described above guides the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side in a rectified manner. Further, the payout unit 35 described above can communicate with the prize ball passage 34 and discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 downward in units of one ball. Further, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game ball flowed down from the payout unit 35 to the ball plate (upper ball plate 18 or lower ball plate 19) as a prize ball.

As shown in FIG. 2, the power supply unit 32 described above is provided at a lower left portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear. Then, the power supply unit 32 converts the AC power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine and supplies the AC power to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub board 104, and the like. Further, the power switch 40 for operating the power supply unit 32 is arranged behind other devices as shown by a hidden line (broken line) in the lower right portion in the drawing. The power switch 40 is installed so as to be turned on when the power switch 40 is pushed below the center and tilted downward so that the dropped game ball does not turn off even if it hits directly.

As shown in FIG. 2, the above-mentioned payout control board 103 is arranged at a lower right portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear. The payout control board 103 has a payout control function that controls the payout unit 35 in response to a command relating to payout from the main board 102 or a loan request from the outside. Further, the launch control board 105 described above has a launch control function that controls the launch device 43 so as to launch the game ball (striking ball) into the game area with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1). ing.

The above-mentioned main board 102 is arranged in the lower center on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly includes various lottery functions, setting change functions, and control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub board 104. It has a central processing function in the pachinko gaming machine 10. The above-mentioned sub-board 104 is arranged in the upper center on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has a function for controlling various effects described later.

Regarding the sub-board 104, a main sub-board (sub-main board 301 in this embodiment) that plays a main role in effect control and a sub-sub-board (in this embodiment) that specializes in a specific effect function such as image creation. Although it is divided into sub-sub-board 302), the term "sub-board" includes these. Further, on the lower right side on the back side of the set board 31, an external relay terminal board (“frame relay terminal board” or the like) that relays signals from the main board 102, the payout control board 103, etc. to an external device of the pachinko gaming machine 10 etc. Also referred to as) 46 is provided.

The function of changing the setting on the main board 102 described above is a function of changing the setting value that defines the theoretical ease of hitting (the degree of advantage of the player). In this embodiment, six types of integer values "1" to "6" are provided as setting values, and for each of these setting values, a theoretical jackpot or small hit probability value, and a probability value related to a theoretical jackpot or small hit, and The payout rate is different. Such changes in the set values, the jackpot probability for each set value, and the like will be described later.
<Board composition of the game board>

Next, the above-mentioned game board 50 and parts (board surface parts) arranged on the board surface of the game board 50 will be described. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of a transparent resin material (for example, transparent acrylic resin) or wood (plywood). Further, the game board 50 is formed in a plate shape, and has a game ball passage for guiding the game ball to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The gaming board 50 is mounted on the front frame 13 of the gaming machine frame 11 with the plate surface on which various board surface parts are mounted facing forward, and is mounted on the front frame 13 of the gaming machine frame 11 by means of a closed glass door 15 or the like. It is designed to cover the front. Further, on the front side of the game board 50, the game area 52 is formed by combining the inner rail and the outer rail formed in a curved strip shape.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game area 52 includes a first start winning opening 62, a second starting winning opening 63, a large winning opening device 90 (attacker unit), an operating opening 68, a plurality of general winning openings 72, and a plurality of general winning openings 72. An out port (58) or the like, which is arranged at the lowermost part of the game area 52 and is hidden behind the operation button 22 in FIG. 1, is provided. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 composed of a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying for the effect, a center decoration 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

Further, the game area 52 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown), a mechanism such as a windmill, and the like. It is also possible not to install a wind turbine. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the lower left of the game area 52 of the game board 50. The specific configuration and function of the main control display device 53 will be described later. Further, the board surface configuration of the gaming board 50 as described above may vary depending on, for example, the game characteristics adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 10.
<Functions of board parts>

Subsequently, specific functions and configurations related to the above-mentioned individual board surface parts will be described. First, the above-mentioned first start winning opening 62 is a starting winning opening related to the first game, and is of a type in which the entrance of the game ball is always opened and the size of the entrance of the game ball is not changed. Further, the first start winning opening 62 has a first starting winning detection device 74 (sensor) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 62, and the output signal of this sensor is described above. Is input to the main board 102 of.

The above-mentioned second start winning opening 63 is a starting winning opening related to the second game, and is arranged on the right side of the first starting winning opening 62. The second start winning opening 63 is a start opening related to an ordinary electric accessory (so-called "electric tulip" or "electric chew"), and when the ordinary symbol described later is stopped and displayed in a hit manner, one side is displayed. (Right side in FIG. 1) is provided with a blade (opening / closing blade) that operates to open. Then, the second start winning opening 63 opens the opening / closing blade for a predetermined time based on the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 63. It will be possible. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment, and the starting port for the second game may not be provided with the ordinary electric accessory, or the starting port for the first game may be provided with the ordinary electric accessory.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second start winning opening 63 includes a second starting winning detection device 75 (sensor) and a normal electric accessory solenoid 76 for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening / closing blade. .. The output signal of the second start winning prize detection device 75 is input to the main board 102.

Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as a mode for opening the second starting winning opening 63. These opening modes include a relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as "short opening" or "short opening") or a relatively long time (for example, about 5 seconds). There are modes (referred to as "long opening", "long opening", etc.). It is also possible to provide a mode of middle opening set to an opening time between short opening and long opening.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned general winning opening 72 includes a general winning detection device 73 (sensor) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The output signal of the general winning detection device 73 is input to the main board 102.

When the general winning detection device 73 is shared by the plurality of general winning openings 72, the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning openings 72 are collected at the place where the general winning detection device 73 is arranged and detected. It is possible to do. It is also possible to group a plurality of general winning openings 72 by positional relationship or by the number of prize balls (shared by the general winning detection device 73).

The above-mentioned large winning opening device 90 is formed in a case shape by combining transparent synthetic resin parts, and although not shown, the large winning opening device 90 is provided inside the large winning opening device 90 to be visible to the player. .. The large winning opening has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is provided inside with an opening / closing door 91 (shown by a broken line in FIG. 1) for opening / closing this opening. Then, when a predetermined hit occurs, the large winning opening performs an opening operation in a predetermined mode. Here, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is opened upward, and the opening / closing door 91 can slide in the front-rear direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the large winning opening device 90 includes a large winning opening detection device 78 for detecting the entry of a game ball and a large winning opening (opening) solenoid that opens and closes and drives the above-mentioned opening / closing door 91. It has 80. Of these, the grand prize detection device 78 has a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the grand prize opening device 90, and the output signal thereof is input to the main board 102.

In addition, various devices can be adopted as the large winning opening device 90. For example, as the large winning opening device 90, one having the large winning opening opened forward, one having the large winning opening opened upward, or the like can be adopted. Further, as the big winning opening device 90, a plurality of types of operation patterns (opening / closing patterns) related to the above-mentioned opening / closing door 91 for opening / closing the large winning opening are provided, and a plurality of different types of different operation patterns are provided during the big hit game in which the special game is executed. It is possible to adopt a device that operates the opening / closing door 91. Further, as the large winning opening device 90, a device having a plurality of large winning openings and distributing game balls to each large winning opening can be adopted according to the situation of the game.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned operating port 68 includes a passage detecting device 69, and the passing detecting device 69 has a sensor for detecting the passage of a game ball at the operating port 68. Then, the output signal of the sensor in the passage detection device 69 is input to the main board 102, and the passage detection device 69 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of the ball entering.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned out port 58 includes an out ball detection device (out port sensor) 82. The out-port sensor 82 detects a game ball (out-ball) that has entered the out-port 58 instead of being a winning ball (safe ball) in the game area 52. Then, the detection result of the out port sensor 82 has come to be used for counting out balls and for displaying (base display) on the performance display unit (described later, the ball entry state display 808 in FIG. 5) described later. There is.

The center decoration 64 described above has a function of directing and the like, and an LED substrate on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided inside the center decoration 64. Then, by driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED is transmitted through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs the light decoration (light effect). Further, the light decoration in the center decoration 64 is performed not only during the game, but also during the waiting for the start of the game, the game preparation for the player to adjust the light amount (light amount setting), and the like. Details related to these will be described later.

Further, a plurality of movable effect members are provided on the back surface (inside) of the center decoration 64, and these movable effect members form a gimmick for effect. These movable effect members are usually hidden inside the center decoration 64 as shown in FIG. However, when a predetermined effect is performed, although not shown, these movable effect members appear in front of the effect display device 60.

Further, in this embodiment, light decoration (light effect) is also performed on the movable effect member. Further, the light decoration of the movable effect member is performed not only during the game, but also during the waiting for the start of the game, the game preparation for the player to adjust the amount of light, and the like.

Further, a game ball passage portion 65 is formed in a portion of the center decoration 64 on the right side when viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 has a function of a flow path of a game ball in addition to the above-mentioned effect function. Have.

Further, the center decoration 64 is provided with a light guide plate 88. Although not shown, the light guide plate 88 may be provided with two transparent plates arranged in parallel with the plate surfaces facing forward and backward, for example. Further, the light guide plate 88 is attached to the center decoration 64, and shields between the outside and the inside of the center decoration 64 in front of the effect display device 60. The light guide plate 88 also functions as a protective cover for the effect display device 60 in the center decoration 64.

The light guide plate 88 can be configured as follows, for example. That is, inside the center decoration 64, a plurality of LEDs serving as light sources are arranged side by side in a band shape so as to face one end face of the transparent plate, for example, the left and right end faces. Then, in a normal state, the display content of the effect display device 60 is transmitted to the outside of the transparent plate so that the player can see it without superimposing another image on the screen of the effect display device 60.

However, the inside of each transparent plate constituting the light guide plate 88 is formed with fine irregularities that cannot be visually recognized under a normal environment. Then, at the time of executing the predetermined effect, for example, the above-mentioned light source facing the end face of one of the transparent plates is driven, and the light of the light source is emitted from the end face of the transparent plate toward the inside of the transparent plate. To. Further, the light is diffused by the unevenness of the transparent plate irradiated with the light, and the diffused light develops and emerges a predetermined illustration or the like so that the player can recognize it.

Further, of the two transparent plates of the light guide plate 88, the other transparent plate is engraved with irregularities for forming an image different from the above-mentioned illustrations and the like. Then, by driving the light source facing the end face at the time of a predetermined effect, an illustration or the like different from the above-mentioned one emerges so that the player can recognize it.

Here, it is possible to direct the light source not only to one of the left and right end faces of the transparent plate but also to one of the upper and lower end faces, and to project another illustration or the like by the light of this light source. By doing so, it is possible to display two types of images on one transparent plate. Further, the number of transparent plates may be one or three or more. It is also possible to use a transmissive liquid crystal display instead of or in combination with the light guide plate 88.

As shown in FIG. 7, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 includes a symbol display board (main symbol display board) 256 in which a large number of LED indicator lights are arranged. The symbol display board 256 corresponds to the ordinary symbol display unit 59 that displays the above-mentioned ordinary symbol, the first special symbol display unit 70 that displays the first special symbol (described later) corresponding to the first game, and the second game. The second special symbol display unit 71 for displaying the second special symbol (described later) and various other display units are formed so as to be visible to the player from the front of the gaming machine. The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display unit 59 constitutes an ordinary symbol display device. Further, the first special symbol display unit 70 constitutes the first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display unit 71 constitutes the second special symbol display device.

In the following, the normal symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "first special symbol", "special diagram 1", "special 1", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be referred to as "second special figure", "special figure 2", "special figure 2", or the like. Further, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1" or "symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2" or "symbol 2".

Further, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 means that the game board 50 is provided, but as will be described later, the setting display unit provided on the main board 102 (setting of FIG. 5A described later). It is also possible to include a display device 807), a performance display unit (ball entry state display 808 in FIG. 5A, which will be described later), and the like as a main control display device. In that case, the setting display unit and the performance display unit provided on the main board 102 can be referred to as, for example, a "main board side main control display device".
<Basic game procedure>

Subsequently, the gaming procedure in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, in a situation where the game ball is supplied to the above-mentioned upper ball plate 18, when the player operates and rotates the above-mentioned firing handle 20, the upper ball plate 18 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The game balls stored in the plate are fired one by one at predetermined intervals. Then, the game ball is guided by the above-mentioned inner rail and outer rail, reaches the upper part of the game area 52, and is discharged from between the inner rail and the outer rail to the game area 52.

In a normal game, the player fires the game ball so as to flow down on the left side of the game area 52, and aims at the first starting winning opening 62 located in the lower central portion of the game area 52. Such a mode of launching mainly using the left side of the game area 52 is so-called left-handed. Further, the firing of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined time interval (for example, an interval not exceeding 100 shots per minute) by the launching device 43 described above while the player is operating the firing handle 20. Then, the game balls continuously released into the game area 52 fall in a direction corresponding to factors such as the speed, the incident angle (or the reflection angle), and the like while interfering with a plurality of game nails and wind turbines.

When the game ball falls into various winning openings such as the above-mentioned general winning opening 72 and the first starting winning opening 62, the winning ball is detected and the payout control of the game ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball plate 18 as prize balls via the above-mentioned payout unit 35 according to the type of winning opening. Further, when the upper ball plate 18 is filled with many game balls and the subsequent game balls paid out cannot enter the upper ball plate 18, these game balls are guided to the lower ball plate 19 as overflow balls. ..

In addition, the game balls that have fallen into various winning openings become safe balls and are guided from the front side to the back side of the game board 50. Further, the game ball that has not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52, falls into the out port (58), and is guided to the back surface side of the game board 50. Then, the game ball that has reached the back surface side of the game board 50 is guided downward through a predetermined guide gutter or a game ball passage in the set base 31, and is directed from the pachinko game machine 10 toward the above-mentioned island equipment side. Is discharged.

The operating port 68 described above is a gate through which the game ball passes, unlike the winning opening for generating the safe ball described above. In the following, the term "winning opening" including the operating port 68, and the terms "falling in", "winning ball", and "winning" in this embodiment include the meaning of "passing" related to the gate.

When the game ball enters the operating port 68, if a predetermined fluctuation start condition (normal figure fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied, the normal symbol (described later) is displayed on the main control display device 53. It is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 shows the result of a random number lottery (general drawing lottery) executed based on the ball entering the operating port 68, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has passed. Will be done.

When the game ball enters the start opening (here, the first start winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63), the predetermined fluctuation start condition (special figure fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied. For example, on the main control display device 53, a special symbol (described later) is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of a random number lottery (big hit lottery) executed based on the ball entering the starting port, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has passed. ..

In the effect display device 60 described above, the effect display related to the special symbol is performed. This effect display differs depending on whether the special symbol is in the variable display or the stop display, and whether the stop display mode of the special symbol is a big hit or an outlier. In relation to this, various predetermined modes of production are performed.

In the big hit game in which the special game is executed, the unit game in which the big winning opening device 90 is activated and the big winning opening (not shown) is opened is repeated a plurality of times. Further, the special game includes a unit game in which the unit game is repeated a maximum number of times and a special game in which the unit game is repeated a number of times less than the maximum number of times. As the maximum number of times, 15 times (15R (round)) and the like can be exemplified, and as the number of times less than the maximum number of times, 5 times (5R) and the like can be exemplified. In addition, a special game in which a unit game in which the opening of the large winning opening is executed is performed only once is referred to as a "small hit".

In each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected in the corresponding large winning opening, or when the total opening time reaches a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds), The end condition is met and the big prize opening is closed. The total opening time as the end condition of the unit game indicates that the upper limit is set even when the opening of the large winning openings is divided into multiple times in one unit game. ing. By opening multiple large winning openings within a unit game, technical intervention is enhanced, and by opening one time, it is possible to easily obtain balls, so that the game playability during big hits can be broadened. The opening mode of the big winning opening can be selected from preset patterns.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a game property in which a plurality of (here, two) games corresponding to the conventional first-class pachinko gaming machine are mixed is adopted. That is, in this embodiment, the plurality of games described above can be divided into a first game in which the first start winning opening 62 is used and a second game in which the second starting winning opening 63 is used. Then, in a situation where the second game is prioritized over the first game and at the same time the start condition of the game is satisfied, the second game is preferentially executed and the first game is reserved. The first game and the second game are not executed at the same time.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the end of the special game, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery described above. This specific game is different from the above-mentioned special game, and is in a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In this embodiment, as the specific game, a probability variation game (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation"), a variation time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction"), and a ball entry facilitation game are provided. As the specific game, there are those in which only one of the probability change, the time saving, and the ball entry facilitation game is executed, and there are those in which a plurality of specific games are performed at the same time, and different game characteristics are created by combining them.

When the specific game is executed, the notification regarding the launch position and launch timing of the game ball recommended by the image or sound of the effect display device 60 (for example, an effect that encourages right-handed hitting) is executed. Then, when the player increases the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 clockwise to increase the firing force and launches the game ball toward the area on the right side of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center decoration 64 is launched. , Enters the game ball passage portion 65 of the center decoration 64 and flows down the center decoration 64. Further, the game ball released from the center decoration 64 falls in a direction corresponding to the way of hitting the game nails and other structures while hitting the game balls.

A part of the large number of game balls emitted from the center decoration 64 passes through the operating port 68 (see FIG. 1) and is detected by the passage detection device 69 (see FIG. 3). Then, as described above, when the game ball passes through the operating port 68, the above-mentioned normal symbol is variablely displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7), and the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped in a predetermined hit mode. Then, the ordinary electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63 expands for a predetermined time according to the hitting mode.

In this embodiment, the game ball that has reached the right side of the game area 52 can be guided to the vicinity of the second starting winning opening 63 and the large winning opening device 90 by a nail or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, a game for facilitating ball entry is added to the time saving, which is a specific game, and during the time saving, the opening extension of the normal electric accessory and the normal electric role are performed by the game for facilitating ball entry. The combination of the probability fluctuation of the object and the time reduction of the ordinary electric accessory is performed, and the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory described above becomes easy to be executed. Then, during the time saving, when the ordinary electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63 is expanded once, one or a plurality of game balls can enter the second starting winning opening 63. ing.

When a big hit occurs and a special game is executed, the big prize opening (not shown) of the large winning opening device 90 is opened, but during this special game, the player is hit right. It is possible to make it. Then, in this case, before the start of the special game, it is conceivable to execute an effect of urging the player to hit right by using an image or sound of the effect display device 60.
<Example of jackpot type: ST>

Next, the types of jackpots in the above-mentioned first game and second game will be described. First, as jackpots, a jackpot that repeats the above-mentioned unit game 15 times (hereinafter, also appropriately referred to as "15R jackpot") and a jackpot that repeats the unit game 7 times (hereinafter, also appropriately referred to as "7R jackpot") are provided. .. The lottery mode for these big hits will be described later.

The above-mentioned unit game is started in a special game with the opening of the large winning opening device 90, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) is inserted in the large winning opening. It ends when the number of game balls (more than one) falls, and the big prize opening is closed. A special game in which such a unit game is repeated is based on a so-called ball-out (sometimes referred to as a ball-out) game for the purpose of having a player acquire a game ball. Further, among various big hits, the 15R big hit and the 7R big hit are intended to make the player acquire a relatively large number of game balls.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a type of a part of the big hit, for example, a part of the 15R big hit or the 15R big hit can be provided with a non-probable change (15R normal or 7R normal). In addition, for example, even if the jackpot is 15R, the opening period of the jackpot is short, and only the same amount of balls as the 5R jackpot can be obtained (15R probability variation (actual 5R)), or the 5R jackpot is provided. Even so, it is possible to provide such a thing that it is almost impossible to obtain a ball (for example, only a minimum amount (for example, one ball) is entered into the large winning opening device 90 in each R).

Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned specific gaming states such as probability change and time reduction are generated for a predetermined specific jackpot. As a mode of occurrence of such a specific game state, it is possible to provide a big hit that does not give at least one of the privilege functions such as probability change, time reduction, and ball entry facilitation game. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit with only a probability change or a big hit with only a short time. Furthermore, it is possible to make different types of jackpots depending on the difference in the duration of the probability change and the difference in the duration of the shortened working hours. In addition, when the electric chew support is also executed during the time reduction, the "duration of the electric chew support" can be rephrased as the "duration of the electric chew support". Furthermore, it is also conceivable to execute only the electric chew support out of the time saving and the electric chew support.

However, the combination of the big hit and the probability change, the time reduction, etc. is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various combinations can be adopted. For example, the probability variation may occur for all jackpots. In this case, all the 15R jackpots in this embodiment are 15R jackpots with probability variation (15R probability variation), and all 7R jackpots are 7R jackpots with probability variation (7R probability variation).
<Hits other than big hits>

Further, in this embodiment, a small hit is provided as a type of hit other than the big hit. When this small hit occurs in the first game (or the second game), the large winning opening device 90 is opened, for example, once. The lottery mode for small hits will be described later.
<Main control display device>
<< Configuration of main control display device >>

Next, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) will be described with reference to FIG. 7. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control display device 53 on the game board side arranges a large number (36 in this case) of LED indicator lights in two rows (upper and lower) on the symbol display board 256. It is configured. In this embodiment, the number of LED indicator lights in the upper and lower stages is 18, and the LED indicator lights in each stage are arranged at equal intervals in the horizontal direction. In addition, the distance between the LED indicator lights, which are in a vertical positional relationship, is also constant for all 18 LEDs.

In the main control display device 53, the 10 LED indicator lights at the right end in the upper row when viewed from the front are used for information display according to the special figure 1, and the 10 LED indicator lights at the right end in the lower row are shown in the special figure 2. It has come to be used for displaying such information. Then, in the upper and lower rows, the two LED indicators at the right ends form a first special symbol storage display unit 83 and a second special symbol storage display unit 84 that indicate the number of reserved storages. The eight LED indicator lights arranged to the left of the first special symbol storage display unit 83 constitute the first special symbol display unit 70 described above, and are arranged to the left of the second special symbol storage display unit 84. The LED indicator lights constitute the second special symbol display unit 71 described above.

The first special symbol display unit 70 is capable of variable display and stop display of the first special symbol related to the first game depending on the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lights arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. The first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 70 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 62, and the variable display is predetermined. When stopped in the hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. It should be noted that the first special symbol display unit 70 has a maximum of 255 (= 2 ^ 8) when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, except when all the LED indicators are turned off by the combination of turning on and off. -1) It is possible to display various types of identification information.

Similarly, with respect to the above-mentioned second special symbol display unit 71, depending on the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lights arranged in a row in the horizontal direction, a maximum of 255 (= 2) is displayed when the second special symbol is stopped. ^ 8) It is possible to display various types of identification information.

Further, in the upper row, the four LED indicator lights arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display unit 70 are used for displaying information related to a normal symbol (normal symbol). The two LED indicators arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display unit 70 constitute the ordinary symbol storage display unit 85 for displaying the number of reserved storages of the ordinary symbol, and on the left side thereof. The two LED indicator lights arranged side by side constitute a normal symbol display unit 59.

The normal symbol display unit 59 is adapted to perform variable display and stop display of the normal symbol according to the operation mode of the two LED indicator lights. Then, the normal symbol display unit 59 can display up to 3 (= 2 ^ 2-1) types of identification information at the time of stop display.

Further, the round number display unit 86 is composed of two LED indicators arranged on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 59 in the upper row and two four LED indicators located on the left end of the lower row below the normal symbol display unit 59. Further, in the lower row, the four LED indicator lamps between the round number display unit 86 and the second special symbol display unit 71 are the first status display unit (status indicator lamp 1) 87a and the second status display unit in order from the left. (Status indicator 2) 87b, a third status display unit (status indicator 3) 87c, and a fourth status display unit (status indicator 4) 87d.

The first state display unit 87a described above is lit when the probability fluctuation function related to the special figure is activated, and the second state display unit 87b is lit when the probability fluctuation function related to the normal drawing is activated. There is. Further, the second state display unit 87b is lit even when the opening is extended, which is the so-called electric support (electric chew support) state. Further, the third state display unit 87c is used as a separate (right-handed) state indicator light. Further, the fourth state display unit 87d is used as an error indicator lamp.

Here, the above-mentioned third state display unit 87c (separate state indicator light) is lit not only during the electric support state but also during the big hit. In addition, during the big hit, even if it is during the consecutive villas, the flag (electric support flag) for setting the electric support state is off. Further, the third state display unit 87c is lit even when the normal electric accessory in a state other than these (normal time) is long open.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) having such a configuration is electrically connected to the main board 102 described above. Then, various display units in the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102. In FIG. 3, among various display units in the main control display device 53, only the normal symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 are shown.
<< Functions of main control display device >>

When the game ball passes through the above-mentioned operating port 68, the normal symbol display unit 59 blinks, and the variation display of the normal symbol is executed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time (normal symbol fluctuation time) elapses after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol is displayed in the out-of-order mode (out-of-shape mode), it is normal if the ball enters the subsequent operating port after the lapse of a predetermined stop time (normal figure stop fixed time). The next variation display related to the symbol is started. In addition, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode (hit mode), the process shifts to the next variable display as in the case of the loss, while the hit of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed earlier is displayed. Depending on the aspect, the second start winning opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

The number of holdings related to the normal symbol lottery is the number of game balls that have passed through the operating port 68 while the normal symbol is changing, and indicates the number of times the normal symbol lottery has not yet been executed. That is, if the symbol change previously performed in the normal symbol memory display unit 85 is not completed, the fluctuation start condition is not satisfied, and when the symbol change is completed, the fluctuation start condition is satisfied and is held. Based on the stored lottery result (holding lottery result), a new symbol change will be started. The upper limit of the number of holdings is 4, and the holding storage does not exceed 4 pieces.

For the display of four types of numerical values by the normal symbol storage display unit 85, for example, when the number of holds is 0 (no hold), both are turned off, and when the number of holds is 1, one of them is turned on. It is possible to turn off the other one. Further, when the number of holds is 2, both are lit, when the number of holds is 3, one of them is lit and the other is blinked, and when the number of holds is 4, both are blinked. Can be displayed.

The display of the number of reserved numbers of the first special symbol by the first special symbol storage display unit 83 described above is performed by displaying four types of information with two LED indicator lights as one set. The display of the number of reserved numbers of the second special symbol by the second special symbol storage display unit 84 described above is also performed by displaying four types of information with the two LED indicator lights as one set.

When the game situation in which the right-handed hit should be performed is reached, the display is performed in a predetermined mode using the third state display unit 86c of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7). In this embodiment, the third state display unit 86c is set to be turned off at the time of left-handed hitting, which is a game situation to be left-handed, and to be turned on at the time of right-handed hitting, which is a game situation to be right-handed.
<Structure of production display device and basic display contents>

Subsequently, the configuration of the effect display device 60 described above and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, a large-sized (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, other effect displays such as an effect display for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by the main control display device 53, a story display, and the like are performed. Although various images are displayed on the effect display device 60, here, a basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the main control display device 53, the effect display device 60 displays the effect as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B. A variable effect with a variable display of 190 symbols (also referred to as “decorative symbols”) is executed. In this embodiment, the effect symbol 190 is composed of the left effect symbol 190a, the middle effect symbol 190b, and the right effect symbol 190c. In the following, the left, middle, and right effects symbols 190a to 190c may be described as "effect symbols 190" or "effect symbols 190a to 190c" depending on the situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 190 has seven types of element symbols (symbol element effect symbols) having the meanings of the symbols "1" to "7". Further, here, in order not to complicate the explanation, the explanation is given using seven kinds of element symbols having the meanings of the symbols "1" to "7". The element symbols include, for example, a predetermined word. It is also possible to adopt a symbol that has a meaning other than numbers, such as. Further, as an element symbol, it is possible to use a number having a meaning and another meaning. In addition, in order to execute a special effect (pseudo continuous notice or special zone effect described later), an effect suggestion that appears (displayed by adding or replacing a normal symbol) only at a certain fluctuation is performed. In a broad sense, the special symbol for the purpose is also included in the production symbol 190.

With the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is variablely displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8A). In this embodiment, the variable display of the effect symbols is such that the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are individually moved (vertically scrolled) in the vertical direction, and the above-mentioned element symbols are sequentially displayed in the display area 194. Is executed by. As the scroll direction of the effect symbols 190a to 190c, various modes such as a horizontal direction, a rotation, and a turn can be adopted in addition to the vertical direction.

Further, the effect symbol 190 may form a so-called "reach" combination as an intermediate stage of the variable display. In this "reach", two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) have the same number, such as "7" and "7", and have the same meaning. Alternatively, the combination is composed of symbols having a predetermined relationship. Further, in this "reach", the remaining one symbol (here, the medium effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that compose the reach combination is in a change that cannot form a combination with other effect symbols. It has become.

As the display mode of the effect symbol 190, many types of "reach" and various other types can be adopted, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects other than the effect by the effect symbol 190 are performed, and the details thereof will be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be a thing. Further, the effect display device 60 is not limited to the one provided with only one display body, and may be composed of a combination of a plurality of display bodies by adding, for example, an additional display body.

Further, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member and to form a gimmick by the additional display body. Then, usually, an additional display body is arranged avoiding the outside of the display area 194 so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, it is conceivable that an additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.
<Configuration related to setting change function>

Next, the configuration related to the setting change described above and the method of setting change will be described. FIG. 5A shows a partially enlarged state in which the main substrate 102 is housed in the transparent substrate case 801. FIG. 5B shows a cross section taken along the line AA in FIG. 5A. It is shown enlarged and outlined. In FIG. 5A, the substrate case 801 is formed of a colorless and transparent plastic material in a box shape having a divided structure (for example, a two-divided structure).

As the divided structure of the substrate case 801, for example, a substrate holder that holds the main substrate 102 is combined with a cover body, and the substrate holder and the cover body are connected via a caulking structure that leaves a trace at the time of separation. Can be adopted. In the board case 801, the connector 802 (shown with a code only partly) used for connecting to other devices such as the sub-main board 301 and the like is formed in a size that does not cause a gap as much as possible. It is exposed from the opened opening.

The main board 102 is visible through the transparent board case 801. In FIG. 5A, the CPU (main CPU) 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the above-mentioned setting display 807, and the above-mentioned input are also shown. The spherical state indicator 808 is shown by a broken line, and the other devices are not shown. Of these, the test terminal mounting area 806 is an area in which the test terminal is mounted only when a ball ejection test or the like is performed in the product test stage, and the test terminal is mounted on the main board 102 in the mass production stage. Not.

The above-mentioned setting display 807 displays the selected setting value only when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. Then, the setting display 807 is currently set with respect to a set value for making the operating probability of the accessory continuous operating device (the operating probability of the device that continuously operates the special electric accessory, the so-called jackpot probability) different. The value can be displayed. Further, the setting display 807 uses a one-digit 7-segment display. Here, in this embodiment, although not shown, a dot display unit is provided in the lower right corner of the 7-segment display in the setting display 807.

A setting key cylinder (also referred to as a "setting key switch") 809 and a setting change button (also referred to as a "setting change switch") 810 are arranged in the vicinity of the setting display 807, and the setting key cylinder 809 and the setting are arranged. The setting change operation unit 811 is configured by the change button 810 and the like. As shown in FIG. 5B, the setting change operation unit 811 opens the setting change opening / closing lid (hereinafter referred to as “opening / closing lid”) 812 of the board case 801 to show FIG. 5A. It is designed to be exposed as shown.

The opening / closing lid 812 is, for example, integrally molded with the substrate case 801 via a resin hinge, and the protruding knob portion 813 is pulled by a finger to open it as shown by an arrow B while resisting an elastic force. Can be exemplified. When closing the opening / closing lid 812, the lid is laid down from the state shown in FIG. 5B (not shown), and the free end side is locked to the substrate case 801.

The above-mentioned ball entry state display 808 is used as a performance display unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and can display a base (value of the number of prize balls per number of shots) for each game state. In this embodiment, as shown by an enlarged solid line in the lower right portion of FIG. 5A, a 4-digit 7-segment display is used for the ball entry status display 808. Further, a dot display unit (reference numeral omitted) is provided in the lower right corner of the 7-segment display of each digit of the ball entry status display 808.

In this embodiment, as described above, the CPU 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the ball entry status display 808, the setting change operation unit 811, and the setting display 807 lap in a plan view (rear view of the gaming machine). It is arranged so that it does not overlap (does not overlap). Further, in order to prevent misidentification of the display, the ball entry status display 808 and the setting display 807 are arranged at intervals of a predetermined distance or more (for example, 30 mm or more).

In this embodiment, the left side in FIG. 5B is the free end when the gaming machine frame 11 is opened, and the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 are arranged near the free end side. By doing so, consideration is given to making it easier to change the set value, etc., while the ball entry status indicator 808 is arranged on the rotation axis (fixed end) side when the gaming machine frame 11 is opened. , When the gaming machine frame is opened, consideration is given to prevent the displayed information from being unintentionally viewed by the player. Of course, if priority is given to fraud prevention when changing the set value, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 should be formed on the right side of the main board 102 when viewed from the front (the rotation axis side of the gaming machine frame 11). Just do it.

Here, in this embodiment, in consideration of the above points, an opening / closing lid 812 is provided in the portion corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811 so that the setting change operation unit 811 cannot be easily accessed, and the set value is set. The setting change operation unit 811 is configured so as not to be exposed except for the case of change work, confirmation work of setting information, and the like. In the following, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 will be described with reference to FIG. 5B.

First, in the upper surface portion of the board case 801 that has a positional relationship corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811 so that the setting key (key) can be inserted into the setting key insertion port (sign omitted) of the setting key cylinder 809. Further, an opening 816 having a predetermined size is formed so that the setting change button 810 can be operated. However, by forming a partition wall such as a side wall from the opening 816 toward the upper surface of the main board 102, other electronic components (for example, CPU 501) of the main board 102 cannot be accessed through the opening 816. It has become. Further, the setting key cylinder 809 in which the setting key insertion port (reference numeral omitted) is formed corresponding to the opening 816, and the push-type setting change button 810 are moved up and down when viewed from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Further, an opening / closing lid 812 corresponding to the size of the opening 816 is provided on the substrate case 801 so as to be openable / closable in a state of being urged in a direction of always closing the opening 816.

Next, an outline of the operation method such as setting change and the operation of setting change / setting display will be briefly described. To confirm the set value, first operate the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) to turn off the power, then open the open / close lid 812 at a predetermined angle against the urging force, and set the key cylinder 809. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key slot and rotate the key to the right. Then, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power without pressing the initialization switch 544. By this operation, the current set value (for example, if the range of the set value is "1" to "6", the corresponding numerical value) is displayed on the setting display 807 formed of the 7-segment LED, and the setting display mode is set. Some segments (here, dot portions) are driven to light to indicate that there is. In this embodiment, when the gaming machine is running (for example, control based on the input related to the progress of the game such as winning detection of the starting winning opening can be executed), the setting value change processing is performed. Is configured so that it cannot be done.

On the other hand, when changing the set value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the opening / closing lid 812 is opened at a predetermined angle against the urging force, and the setting key is used. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key insertion port of the cylinder 809 and rotate the key to the right. Then, while pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value is blinked on the setting display 807 formed of the 7-segment LED, and some segments (here, the dot part) are turned off (off) to indicate that the setting change mode is set. Is displayed.

In this state, each time the setting change button 810 is pressed, a new setting value added by +1 to the current setting value is temporarily stored, and the stored setting value is displayed on the setting display 807. The administrator in the amusement park operates the setting change button 810 so as to set an arbitrary (target) setting value. In this embodiment, if the set value at the time of turning on the power is "1", each time the setting change button 810 is pressed once, "1", "2" ... "5", "6", "1" Is changed as follows.

Then, by operating the setting change button, the key inserted in the setting key cylinder 809 is rotated to the left in a state where the setting value is changed to an arbitrary setting value (the arbitrary setting value is displayed on the setting display 807), and the setting is made. After the change process is completed and the current set value is lit and displayed on the setting display 807 and some segments (dot portion in this case) are lit for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms), the set value is displayed. And both the dots are turned off.
<Structure of production display device and basic display contents>

Subsequently, the configuration of the effect display device 60 described above and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, a large-sized (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, other effect displays such as an effect display for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by the main control display device 53, a story display, and the like are performed. Although various images are displayed on the effect display device 60, here, a basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the main control display device 53, the effect display device 60 displays the effect as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B. The variable display of the symbol (also referred to as a decorative symbol) 190 is executed. In this embodiment, the effect symbol 190 is composed of the left effect symbol 190a, the middle effect symbol 190b, and the right effect symbol 190c.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left effect symbol 190a has nine types of element symbols (symbol element effect symbols) having the meanings of the symbols "1" to "9". The other effect symbols, the middle effect symbol 190b and the right effect symbol 190c, also have nine types of element symbols meaning the numbers "1" to "9", like the left effect symbol 190a. The details of the above-mentioned element symbols will be described later.

With the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is variablely displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8A). In this embodiment, the variable display of the effect symbols is such that the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are individually moved (vertically scrolled) in the vertical direction, and the above-mentioned element symbols are sequentially displayed in the display area 194. Is executed by.

Further, the effect symbol 190 may form a so-called "reach" combination as an intermediate stage of the variable display. In this "reach", two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) have the same number, such as "7" and "7", and have the same meaning. Alternatively, the combination is composed of symbols having a predetermined relationship. Further, in this "reach", the remaining one symbol (here, the medium effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that compose the reach combination is in a change that cannot form a combination with other effect symbols. It has become.

As the display mode of the effect symbol 190, many types of "reach" and various other types can be adopted, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects other than the effect by the effect symbol 190 are performed, and the details thereof will be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be a thing. Further, the effect display device 60 is not limited to the one provided with only one display body, and may be composed of a combination of a plurality of display bodies by adding, for example, an additional display body.

Further, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member and to form a gimmick by the additional display body. Then, usually, an additional display body is arranged avoiding the outside of the display area 194 so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, it is conceivable that an additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.
<Electrical configuration of pachinko game machines>

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described, but here, the main electrical configuration will be extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided with a power supply board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub-main board 301, and the like. Of these, the above-mentioned payout control board 103, game ball rental device connection terminal board 106, launch control board 107, and the like are connected to the power supply board 251. Further, the main board 102 is connected to the payout control board 103 via the frame relay terminal board 108. Further, a main symbol display board (also referred to as a "design display board") 256 and a sub-main board 301 constituting the above-mentioned main control display device 53 are connected to the main board 102, and the sub-main board 301 is connected to the sub-main board 301. , The above-mentioned sub-sub board 302 is connected.

The power supply board 251 of the various configurations described above is provided in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2) described above. A frame effect connection board 300 and a game ball rental device connection terminal board (not shown) are connected to the power supply board 251, and a ball is connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board (not shown). A ball coin operation board or the like used for coin operation is connected.

A touch switch 310 provided on the launch handle 20 (see FIGS. 1 and 20) is connected to the launch control board 105 described above. Although not shown, the touch switch 310 is connected to a firing touch lever and a lock fitting for grounding. The touch switch (also referred to as “touch sensor”) 310 detects the contact when a player, a game hall clerk, or the like touches the firing handle 20 with a finger (FIG. 20 (b)), and determines the mode of the output signal. Change.

Further, the launch control board 105 is connected to the launch intensity volume 311, the launch stop switch 312, and the launch device 43 described above. Of these, the firing intensity volume 1311 is used to change the firing intensity of the game ball according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20. The launch stop switch 312 is used to detect an operation with a part of a finger (thumb or the like) holding the launch handle 20 and stop the launch.

The electric power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103 and the frame relay terminal board. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the main board 102 is provided with a main control display device 53, passage detection devices 69a, 69b, and a normal electric motor via a game board connection board and a game board relay terminal board (not shown). Object solenoid 76, first start prize detection device 74, second start prize detection device 75, general prize detection device 73, large prize detection device 78, large prize opening (open) solenoid 80, magnetic sensor and radio wave sensor (illustration) Omitted) etc. are connected. Here, in the present embodiment, the connection of the first start winning detection device 74 and the second start winning detection device 75 to the main board 102 is directly performed without going through the game board connection board or the game board relay terminal board. It is done.

The power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the sub-main board 301 via the frame effect connection board 300 and the frame connection board 303. Further, in the sub-main board 301, in addition to the above-mentioned frame connection board 303 and frame effect connection board 300, the glass frame effect connection relay board 305 and the glass frame effect connection board 306 are used for the effect on the gaming machine frame 11. Each device is connected.

As the production equipment in the pachinko gaming machine 10, there are a frame illuminated L2 substrate 317, a frame illuminated R2 substrate 318, (left) speaker 21 (L), (right) speaker 21 (R), and the like. Further, in the present embodiment, a cross key (cross button) board, an effect button board, an elevating motor, an effect button (operation button) motor, a button position sensor, and the like are also provided, but these are not shown in FIG. doing.

Further, a device for a game board, a device for displaying an image, a device for voice control, and the like are also connected to the sub-main board 301. Among these, as a device for a game board, there is a board surface illumination connection board 331. The board surface illumination connection board 331 is connected to the sub-main board 301 via the frame connection board 303 and the effect interface board 304 described above. The center illumination board 332 used for the illumination of the center decoration 64 is connected to the board surface illumination connection board 331. Further, although not shown, the effect sensor substrate, other illumination boards, the effect motor, and the like are also connected to the board surface illumination connection board 331, although not shown. Here, although not shown, various illumination boards and effect motors are connected to the effect interface board 304.

The above-mentioned image display device connected to the sub-main board 301 includes a sub-sub board (image control board) 302, and the sub-sub board 302 has a liquid crystal unit (also a liquid crystal module) via an image display connection A board 336. 42 is connected. Here, in this embodiment, although not shown, another liquid crystal unit connected to the effect interface board 304 via the image display connection B board is also provided. Further, as the above-mentioned voice control device connected to the sub-main board 301, there are a voice control board (voice board) 339 and a voice ROM (ROM) board 340.

Subsequently, the configurations of the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted on the main board 102. Among these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. The "ROM" and "RWM" described in this embodiment are comprehensive concepts including both those built in the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

Further, although not shown, in the CPU device mounted on the main board 102, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a random number clock generation circuit, a 16-bit random number circuit, and an 8-bit random number are included. A random number circuit for the purpose is provided. Of these, the random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and the random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers, which are built-in random numbers.

Further, the main board 102 is equipped with an input / output port 505 for inputting / outputting data to / from an external device of the main board 102. Further, although not shown, various circuit parts such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main board 102.

The ROM 502 described above stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform processing related to the game, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the above-mentioned RWM 503 rewritably stores data required for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the game program is executed by the CPU 501.

Subsequently, a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513 are mounted on the payout control board 103. Of these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. Further, the ROM 512 stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform a process related to the payout, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the above-mentioned RWM 513 rewritably stores data required for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the payout program is executed by the CPU 501.

The above-mentioned sub-main board 301 includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. .. The output side of the main board 102 is connected to the input side of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, ROM 522, work RWM 523, output port 528, and the like are connected to the output side of the input port 527.

The CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on the effect control command (command) for displaying the symbol transmitted from the main board 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RWM523 temporarily stores the work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. Memory.

Data transmission / reception between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 described above is performed in the form of one-way communication (one-way communication) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. Since the one-way communication between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 is ensured, data cannot be transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the main board 102. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 cannot be referred to by the sub-main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub-main board 301. In order to enable such communication in one direction, for example, a communication regulating means (buffer circuit or the like) is mounted on the main board 102, and data output to the sub-main board 301 is performed by using this communication regulating means. It can be done through.

The sub-sub board 302 described above includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, an input port 538, an output port 539, a bus line (not shown), and the like. Further, the image controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540. The output side of the sub-main board 301 is connected to the input side of the input port 538, and each device such as the CPU 531, the work RWM 532, and the program ROM 533 is connected to the output side of the input port 538.

The above-mentioned video memory 540 is a memory for storing the display data displayed on the effect display device 60, and the display content (frame image) of the effect display device 60 is rewritten by rewriting the content of the image data in the video memory 540. ) Is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timings of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Further, the symbols are superimposed in the order of the layers in which the priority is determined in advance and displayed on the effect display device 60.
<Power supply and data backup>

The power supply board 251 described above includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and an initialization switch circuit unit 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 supplies an operating voltage required for each of the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside and applies a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, etc. to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. And supply to other predetermined equipment.

The initialization switch circuit unit 543 sends an initialization signal to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 to clear the backup data when the power is turned on, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is pressed by the manager of the game store. It is equipped with a circuit that outputs. As will be described later, the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 can retain (back up) the stored data even when the power supply to the power supply board is cut off. Then, when the above-mentioned initialization signal is input to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on, the data (backup data) backed up by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 is displayed. It will be cleared. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main board is configured to transition to the setting change state according to the input status of the initialization switch 544 and the input status of the setting key when the power is turned on. It is configured so that the presence / absence of initialization, the range of initialization, and the like can be determined according to the signal from the initialization switch circuit unit 543 and the input signal related to the setting key.

The initialization switch 544 is divided into one for the main board 102 and one for the payout control board 103, and the backed up data is cleared separately for the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. You may do it. Further, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is operated at the time of power-up, the backup data for the main board 102 and a part of the backup data of the payout control board 103 are cleared and added to the payout control board 103. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining backup data of the payout control board 103 is cleared by further operating the payout initialization switch (not shown).

As described above, the RWM 503 on the main board 102 is capable of holding (backing up) data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply board 251 even after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off. That is, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 503a can be used as a stack pointer when the power is cut off (when a power failure occurs) when the power is cut off due to a power failure (including a so-called momentary power failure due to a momentary voltage drop). , Each register, an area for storing the values of I / O and the like. Then, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before the power is cut off based on the information of the backup area 503a when the normal power supply is started up or the power failure is resolved.

Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is cut off by the power off processing (described later), and restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is executed in the power on processing (described later) when the power is turned on. .. As the backup area 503a, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 501 and connected to a backup power supply.

Further, with respect to the RWM 513 on the payout control board 103, similarly to the RWM 503 on the main board 102, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply board 251 after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off so that data can be retained (backed up). It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at the time of power failure, each register, the value of I / O, etc. when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like (when a power failure occurs). Area. Then, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before the power is cut off based on the information of the backup area 513a when the normal power supply is started up or the power failure is resolved.

Writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is cut off by the power off processing in the payout control board 103, and restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is performed when the power is turned on in the payout control board 103 ( It is executed in the control start process). As the backup area 513a, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 511 and connected to the backup power supply, as in the case of the main board 102.

The main board 102 described above is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure or the like as described above. The power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal (power failure signal) to the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. More specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors the DC stable (for example, 30 volts) voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply board 251 and this voltage becomes less than a predetermined voltage. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure (power cutoff) is detected and the above-mentioned power failure signal is output. Based on the input of such a power cut signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute a predetermined power cut process.

The electrical characteristics of the main board 102 and the like are such that even after the DC stable voltage becomes less than the predetermined voltage at which the power failure signal is output, a sufficient time is required to execute a predetermined process such as a power supply disconnection process. During that time, the output of the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is maintained at a normal value.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the output of the power supply board may be supplied to the payout control board 103 via the main board 102, or may be individually supplied to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 in a separate system. You may do so.

Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 described above can be arranged in a portion other than the main board 102. For example, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply board 251 and a power failure signal may be input from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to each board on the power supply board 251. It is also possible to omit the input of the power interruption signal from the main board 102 to the payout control board 103. Further, the main board 102 may be able to exert the function of the power supply board 251. In this case, it is conceivable to form the power supply unit 541 on the main board 102.

Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided on the payout control board 103, and each of the payout control board 103 and the main board 102 may output a power failure signal and perform a power failure process based on the power failure signal. Further, of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided only on the payout control board 103, and the power failure signal may be transmitted from the payout control board 103 to the main board 102.

Here, the above-mentioned main CPU 501, payout CPU 511, and the like are provided with an NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminal. Further, as the trigger for executing the above-mentioned power cutoff process, a hardware-like one that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on a power cutoff signal indicating a voltage drop is input to the NMI terminal of the main CPU, and a timer. There is a software-like process that checks the power off flag set when a voltage drop is detected in a periodic interrupt process based on the settings.

In this embodiment, the power supply cutoff process is performed based on a hardware-like opportunity by NMI. Then, the signal input to the NMI terminal can be performed, for example, by inputting the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal can occur not only when the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal, but also when noise is mixed into the signal line connected to the NMI terminal. The transition to the power off processing can also be performed based on a software-like method, as will be described later as another embodiment. Further, it is also possible to set the power supply cutoff flag based on the power supply cutoff signal input to the NMI terminal to trigger the execution of the power supply cutoff process. Here, the data is backed up by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, but the data is not limited to this. For example, the data of the storage area is backed up by the sub-main board 301, and the main board 301 is the main. It is also possible to perform data backup in the same manner as the board 102 or the payout control board 103.

Next, the basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main board 102 of this embodiment fulfills various functions such as ball entry determination, lottery, and command transmission by the functions of the above-described configurations (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 6 shows typical functional means in each of the main substrate 102, the sub-main substrate 301, and the sub-sub substrate 302. Of these, the main board 102 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a first lottery means 111, a second lottery means 112, a general drawing lottery means 113, a hold control means 114, a main display control means 115, and a special game control means 116. It includes specific game control means 117, open / close control means 118, advance information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120, and the like. Then, the main board 102 uses these functional means to draw a lottery for a special symbol, a lottery for a normal symbol, hold control, a main control display, a special game, a specific game, an open / close control, and prior information, as described in order below. Execute notification etc.

The above-mentioned winning ball determination means 110 includes sensors provided at each winning opening for entering a game ball into each winning opening (operating opening, various starting winning openings, large winning opening, general winning opening, out opening, etc.). Judgment is made based on the signal output from.
<< Win / Loss Lottery Function for Special Designs >>

The first lottery means 111 described above executes the first lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning opening 62. The first lottery means 111 has the functions of the first lottery value acquisition means 121, the first hit / fail determination means 122, the first symbol determination means 123, and the first pattern determination means 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 70 of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7) described above.

Similarly, the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning opening 63. The second lottery means 112 has the functions of the second lottery value acquisition means 125, the second winning / failing determination means 126, the second symbol determination means 127, and the second pattern determination means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 71 of the main control display device 53 described above.

The first lottery value acquisition means 121 provided in the first lottery means 111 described above sets the value of the big hit random number related to the first lottery as the first winning / failing lottery value when the ball enters the first starting winning opening 62. Get as. Further, the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 sets the value of the jackpot random number related to the second lottery to the second winning or failing when the ball enters the second starting winning opening 63. Obtained as a lottery value.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number acquired as the first winning / failing lottery value and the jackpot random number acquired as the second winning / failing lottery value are a hardware random number (hard random number) and a software random number (soft random number). It is generated by the calculation (addition) used. As the hardware random number, for example, the built-in random number generated by the random number circuit for 16 bits is used, and as the software random number, the value updated for each interrupt by the random number generation program in the software is used. In addition, either one of the hardware random number and the software random number may be used.

The first winning / failing determination means 122 in the first lottery means 111 makes a winning / failing determination based on the first winning / failing lottery value, and whether or not the first winning / failing lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (winning value) to be a hit. To judge. Similarly, the second winning / failing determination means 126 in the second lottery means 112 makes a winning / failing determination based on the above-mentioned second winning / failing lottery value, and the second winning / failing lottery value becomes a predetermined value (winning value) to be a hit. Judge whether it is applicable or not. In the winning / failing determination by the first winning / failing determination means 122 and the second winning / failing determination means 126, the winning / failing determination table (for example, FIG. 9 (for example, FIG. a)) is used. Here, the big hit at the time of normal probability change shown in FIG. 9A indicates a random number value range that is always a big hit, and the big hit at the time of probability change is a random value range that becomes a big hit only at the time of probability change. It is shown that.

When the first symbol determining means 123 in the first lottery means 111 and the second symbol determining means 127 in the second lottery means 112 win either the jackpot in the jackpot lottery relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , The type of special symbol is determined based on the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 10). The jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the symbol lottery value, which is a random number value (symbol random number) related to symbol determination, and the type of special symbol.

Here, the symbol lottery value may also be referred to as a "symbol random number per special symbol" or a "symbol random number" related to the special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the type of hit includes a small hit, and the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 are special in the case where the small hit is won in the big hit lottery related to the special symbol. The type of symbol is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 10C).

The symbol lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the starting winning opening, as in the case of the winning / failing lottery value described above. In addition, the type of special symbol is associated with the type of hit, and the type of big hit and the presence or absence of a small hit are determined in association with the acquired symbol lottery value.

The first pattern determining means 124 in the first lottery means 111 and the second pattern determining means 128 in the second lottery means 112 determine the variation pattern of the special symbol in the corresponding special symbol display unit based on the special symbol variation pattern table. decide. The special figure fluctuation pattern table defines the relationship between a large number of special figure fluctuation patterns and a pattern lottery value which is a random number value (variation pattern random number) related to the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

The pattern lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the starting winning opening, as in the case of the winning / failing lottery value described above. Further, the fluctuation patterns related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol correspond to various game situations such as, for example, at the time of big hit, at the time of loss, presence / absence of reach, presence / absence of time reduction, number of holdings, number of fluctuations after big hit, and the like. A plurality of different special figure fluctuation pattern tables are provided.

The fluctuation pattern related to the special symbol (special symbol fluctuation pattern) defines the time (variation time) from the start to the stop of the fluctuation in the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special figure fluctuation pattern defines various long and short fluctuation times, for example, from 1 second or less to several tens of seconds, depending on the type. That is, in each special symbol fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time is set as an end condition of the fluctuation display, and the above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 or second special symbol display unit 71 (see FIG. 7) is special. When the fluctuation display of the symbol is started and the specified fluctuation time elapses, the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

For most of the special figure fluctuation patterns to be selected when the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is set shorter than the special figure fluctuation pattern to be selected when the time is not shortened. However, the special figure fluctuation patterns that can be selected in the case of non-time saving and when the number of holdings is 4, include those having a shorter fluctuation time than the specific special figure fluctuation pattern in the time saving. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, most of the fluctuation patterns selected in a predetermined situation such as a probability change have an extremely short fluctuation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds). Then, in such a situation, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the effect associated therewith are executed based on the fluctuation pattern of the extremely short time.
<< Relationship between the winning / failing random number related to the special symbol and the set value >>

Next, the relationship between the winning / failing random number and the set value related to the special symbol will be described. FIG. 9A shows a hit / fail random number for the set value “1” among the set values “1” to “6” in this embodiment. Regarding the winning / failing random number table of the set value “1” shown in FIG. 9A, the jackpot value at the normal (probability) time in the random number range “0 to 65535” for both the first lottery and the second lottery. Is "0 to 205". Further, normally, the random number range "206 to 64875" is an outlier in both the first lottery and the second lottery.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability (at the time of probability change), "206 to 615" is the big hit value in both the first lottery and the second lottery. Further, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random number value range "616 to 64875" is an outlier in both the normal time and the probability change time. Further, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random number value range "64876 to 65535" is a small hit value in both the normal time and the probability change time.

FIG. 12 shows a list of hit values for each set value. Of these, as for the set value "1", as shown in FIG. 9A, "0 to 205" is the jackpot value at the normal time. Therefore, the number of random numbers is 206, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/318 (≈206/65536). On the other hand, for the set value "2", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 206". Therefore, the number of random numbers is 207, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/317 (≈207 / 65536).

Further, regarding the set value "3", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 207". The number of random numbers is 208, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/315 (≈208/65536). Regarding the set value "4", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 208". The number of random numbers is 209, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/314 (≈209 / 65536).

Further, regarding the set value "5", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 209". The number of random numbers is 210, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/312 (≈208/65536). Regarding the set value "6", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 210". The number of random numbers is 211, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/311 (≈211/65536). In this way, the range of the jackpot value is determined so that the jackpot probability increases as the numerical value of the set value increases.

At the time of high probability, the jackpot value is "0 to 615" for the set value "1", and the jackpot probability is 1/106. For the set values "2" to "6", the jackpot values are "0 to 618", "0 to 621", "0 to 624", "0 to 627", and "0 to 630" in order. , The approximate jackpot probabilities are "1/106", "1/105", "1/105", "1/104", and "1/104" in order.

Here, the reason why the jackpot probability is explained so as to include the same value such as "1/105" and "1/104" is because the jackpot probability is expressed by rounding the decimal point. In the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot value is determined so that the jackpot probability increases as the numerical value of the set value increases. In addition, the multiplication factor of the probability between the low probability time and the high probability time is "3 times" for all the set values, which is common.

For small hits, the random number range is "64876 to 65535" regardless of the set value in both the normal time and the high probability time. Therefore, the probability of small hits is 1/99 regardless of the probability state or the set value. Further, in the example of FIG. 12, the design values of the ball output rate are 97%, 98%, 99%, 100%, 101%, and 102% for the set values "1" to "6", respectively.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 9A and FIG. 12, "0" which is the minimum value of the numerical range is set as a jackpot value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "0" may be excluded from the jackpot value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent fraud in case of fraud that intentionally minimizes the hit / fail random value updated by resetting the power supply or the like. Further, it is possible not to assign "0" to the small hit, or to not assign the maximum value (here, "65535") to the big hit or the small hit.

In this embodiment, a pre-judgment (so-called pre-reading) is performed on the result of the winning / failing lottery performed using the winning / failing random numbers shown in FIGS. 9A and 12; It will be described later based on (a) and (b).
<< Various lottery functions related to ordinary symbols >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned general drawing lottery means 113 will be described. The general map lottery means 113 includes a general map lottery value acquisition unit 129, a general map winning / failing determination means 130, a general map symbol determination means 131, and a general map pattern determination means 132. Then, when the passage of the game ball in the operating port 68 is detected by the above-mentioned entry determination means 110, the general drawing lottery means 113 executes a lottery (general drawing lottery) related to the normal symbol based on the detection result. To do.

In this general drawing lottery, the general symbol lottery value acquisition means 129 acquires the general symbol lottery value which is a random number related to the normal symbol (the general symbol random number), and the general symbol determination means 131 causes the general symbol determination table. Referenced. In this normal figure determination table, the correspondence relationship between the normal figure lottery value and the type of the normal symbol is defined. Then, the normal figure winning / failing determination means 130 determines whether or not the normal symbol associated with the normal figure lottery value corresponds to a hit, and if it corresponds to a hit, the type of hit is determined. Will be done.

Further, the normal figure pattern lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the operating port 68, and the obtained normal figure pattern lottery value is used by the normal figure pattern determining means 132 to obtain a fluctuation pattern related to the normal symbol (normal figure fluctuation pattern). ) Is determined. Each normal figure fluctuation pattern corresponds to the normal figure pattern lottery value which is a random number related to the normal figure fluctuation pattern (random number of the normal figure fluctuation pattern), and is linked to the acquired normal figure pattern lottery value, and the situation of the game. The pattern of fluctuations in the normal map is determined according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, the normal figure lottery value, which is a random number related to the ordinary symbol, and the normal figure pattern lottery value are created by using only software random numbers.
<< Functions related to holding special symbols >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned hold control means 114 will be described. The hold control means 114 includes a first hold means 133, a second hold means 134, and a normal figure hold means 135. Of these, the first holding means 133 is acquired by entering the ball when the first starting winning opening 62 is newly entered and the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the first special symbol is not satisfied. Information (first special figure hold storage information) related to various random numbers (first winning / failing lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily held and stored. In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the first special symbol is set to 4, and the hold related to the first special symbol is possible within the range not exceeding this upper limit value.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that was executed when the above-mentioned ball was entered is completed, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol that occurred before the above-mentioned entry is further completed. If there is no hold related to, the change start condition for the first special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol change for the first special symbol is permitted.

The above-mentioned second holding means 134 is also acquired by entering the ball if the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the second special symbol is not satisfied when the ball is newly entered into the second starting winning opening 63. Information related to various random numbers (second winning / failing lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily held and stored.

When the change display of the second special symbol, which was executed when the ball was entered, is completed, the change start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied, and the new symbol change for the second special symbol is satisfied. Will be allowed. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the hold related to the second special symbol is set to four as in the case of the first special symbol.

In the above-mentioned first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the symbol for starting the special game is stopped and controlled by the special game, the fluctuation start condition is determined after the special game is completed.
<< Functions related to holding ordinary symbols >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned general drawing holding means 135 will be described. The normal figure holding means 135 is a random number (common figure lottery) acquired by entering a ball if a predetermined fluctuation start condition related to a normal symbol is not satisfied when a ball is entered at the operating port 68 (see FIG. 1). Information related to (value, etc.) (Public map hold storage information) is temporarily held and stored. Then, until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol related to the above-mentioned entry is not permitted. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the hold related to the normal symbol is set to 4, and the hold related to the normal symbol is possible within the range not exceeding this upper limit value.

When the variation display of the normal symbol, which was executed when the ball was entered, is completed and the normal electric accessory is not operating, the fluctuation start condition related to the normal symbol is satisfied, and the new normal symbol is related. It will be allowed to change the design.
<< Functions related to main control display >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned main display control means 115 will be described. The main display control means 115 includes a first special figure control means 136, a second special figure control means 137, a normal figure control means 138, a hold display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Among these, the first special symbol control means 136 is changed by the first special symbol display unit 70 (see FIG. 7) according to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol determined by the first lottery means 111. Display (for example, blinking display in which a predetermined part of LED indicator lights blink every 100 msec) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol on the first special symbol display unit 70.

Further, if the fluctuation start condition related to the above-mentioned second special symbol is satisfied, the second special symbol control means 137 follows the fluctuation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112, and the second special symbol display unit 71 ( (See FIG. 7), the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol on the second special symbol display unit 71.

Further, if the fluctuation start condition related to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is satisfied, the ordinary symbol control means 138 follows the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol determined by the ordinary symbol lottery means 113, and the ordinary symbol display unit 59 (see FIG. 7). ), The variable display of the normal symbol is performed. Further, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern elapses, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol on the normal symbol display unit 59.

Further, the hold display control means 139 displays the number of holds related to the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, and ordinary symbol. Then, the display of these reserved numbers is performed by the first special symbol storage display unit 83, the second special symbol storage display unit 84, and the normal symbol storage display unit 85 of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. Be struck. In addition, the above-mentioned other display control means 140 controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol, and various hold displays.
<< Functions related to special games >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned special game control means 116 will be described. When the special game control means 116 hits a big hit and the special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode, it determines that the special game operating condition is satisfied, and as described above, the special game control means 116 determines a predetermined value according to the type of the big hit. A special game to be opened is executed in a mode (a predetermined number of unit games or an opening pattern of a large winning opening during a unit game).
<< Functions related to specific games >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 performs control related to the above-mentioned probability change, time reduction, and the like. The specific game control means 117 shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a probability change state, a time saving state, or the like according to the type of big hit. The probabilistic state is associated with some types of jackpots, not all types of jackpots. Furthermore, for some jackpots, the probability change state continues until the next jackpot, and for other jackpots with probability changes, it continues until the total number of variable displays after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). .. During the probability change state, the jackpot winning probability by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a higher value than in the normal time, which is the non-probability change time.

Further, the time saving state is continued until the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of end condition times (for example, 100 times) counting from the end time of the special game. Further, during the time reduction, the first pattern determining means 124 and the second pattern determining means 128 use the variation pattern for shortening the time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is substantially shorter than that in the normal state. Select.

Further, as described above, the ball entry facilitation game is executed in accordance with the time reduction as the specific game, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory is facilitated, and the ball is placed at the entrance of the second start winning opening. The opening / closing blades can be easily opened. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing blade is controlled by the opening / closing control means 118 described later.
<< Functions related to open / close control >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned opening / closing control means 118 will be described. The opening / closing control means 118 controls the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory (opening / closing blade) of the second starting winning opening 63 and the large winning opening device 90. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the open / close control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 76 to open the ordinary electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63. Further, the opening / closing control means 118 controls to send an opening instruction to the large winning opening (opening) solenoid 80 in the special game, and opens the large winning opening device 90.
<< Functions related to advance information notification >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned advance information notification means 119 will be described. The advance information notification means 119 is acquired when a ball is entered in the first start winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63, regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the entry is suspended. The processing for transmitting the information related to the various random value values to the sub-board (here, the sub-main board 301) as advance notification information is performed.

As the above-mentioned advance notification information, each of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery values (first winning / failing lottery value or second winning / failing lottery value), each symbol lottery value (first symbol lottery value or second symbol lottery value), and each pattern Information such as what kind of winning / failing range, symbol range, and pattern range the lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to can be exemplified.

By transmitting such advance notification information, various pre-reading effects can be performed on the sub-board 104 side. As the look-ahead effect, a hold notice, a continuous notice, and the like can be exemplified, and details of these will be described later.
<< Functions related to command transmission >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned main command transmitting means 120 will be described. The main command transmitting means 120 transmits a command (main command) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. The command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 includes various information at various timings such as when the start prize is won, when the special symbol changes start, when the special symbol changes stop, and when a big hit occurs. ..
<Basic functions of sub-board>

Next, the basic functions of the above-mentioned sub-board 104 will be described. In this embodiment, the sub-board 104 is composed of a sub-main board 301 and a sub-sub-board 302, and fulfills various functions such as command reception from the main board 102, effect pattern determination, effect display control, and effect execution.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-main board 301 includes a main command receiving means 141, an effect pattern determining means 142, a sub-main command transmitting means 143, and the like. Further, the sub-main board 301 is provided with functional means such as a sound control means 144 for controlling the speaker output and the like, and an optical control means 145 for controlling the game effect lamp output and the like.

The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means 142 includes information for designating the display effect displayed on the effect display device 60, and the sound effect and the light effect to be performed together with the display effect as needed. During the variable display of the symbol 190, an effect suggesting a high degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. Here, the "expectation level" in this embodiment can be rephrased as the "reliability level". In the following, "expectation level" describes the production stage (normal pattern, chance-up pattern, fixed pattern) that raises the expectation that it will be a big hit due to fluctuations when it appears among the same type of advance notice production patterns, and one production About the probability that the hit fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to 1 effect when the hit fluctuation pattern (variation pattern in hit fluctuation) information and the deviation fluctuation pattern information (variation pattern in loss fluctuation) are confirmed. It may be used for each of the descriptions of what is described, and in general, "highly expected production" refers to a production that is often a big hit when the production occurs.

When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining means 142, the effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub board 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmission means 143. Further, the command transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 includes sound information and the like in order to read sound data, lamp data, and the like from the ROM of the sub-sub board.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-sub board 302 is provided with sub-main command receiving means 146, effect execution control means 147, and the like. Then, in the sub-sub board 302, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301 to form an animation image. Then, the effect display device 60 displays the moving image for the effect.
<Example of a specific mode relating to a specific game>

Next, a specific mode of the above-mentioned specific game will be described. As described above, as specific games, a special symbol probability variation function (probability variation), a special symbol variation time shortening function (time reduction), and a ball entry facilitation game (ordinary symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction) Function, combination of open extension function of ordinary electric accessory) is provided. Then, at least one of these various specific games is executed according to the result of the big hit lottery (stop display symbol of the special symbol) or the game result during the big hit. In this embodiment, instead of the so-called ST machine described above, a specification is adopted in which the probability variation period continues until the next big hit in some big hits, but a specific embodiment thereof will be described later.
<< Probability fluctuation game >>

The above-mentioned probability change changes the probability state of the game related to the special symbol after the big hit so that the probability of occurrence of the big hit is higher than that of the normal probability state. In pachinko gaming machines that employ ST, the duration of the probabilistic state (probability change period) is determined based on the number of changes in the special symbol.

The number of fluctuations of the special symbol is determined as one from the variation display of the special symbol to the stop display. Then, in the ST, in the probability variation period, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Such a function that allows the probability variation period to end before the next big hit occurs can be referred to as ST or the number-cut probability variation.
<< Game for shortening fluctuation time >>

The above-mentioned time reduction generally shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the main control display device 53 as compared with the case of the normal game. Here, "generally shortening" does not mean that the game is shortened in all cases, and in some cases, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is equivalent to that of the normal game or longer than that of the normal game. It means that it can include. Then, according to this time reduction, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened, even if a prize is continuously generated in the start winning opening (first starting winning opening 62 and second starting winning opening 63), it is special. It is possible to smoothly advance the variable display and the stop display of the symbol at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many opportunities for the big hit lottery.

Further, the duration of the time saving state (time saving period) is determined based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, as in the probabilistic state. Then, in this embodiment, the time saving state is continued until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

In the above example, the probability variation period and the time reduction period are set to the same period, but the probability variation period and the time reduction period may be different from each other. For example, the probability variation period can be set to 104 times, and the time saving period can be set to 100 times. Moreover, the probability change period and the time reduction period are not limited to being constant. For example, the probability variation period can be set to any of 4, 25, 100, and the like depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred. Further, the time saving period can be set to any one of 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times, etc., depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred.

Further, it is possible to provide a so-called fall lottery function. The following can be exemplified as this fall lottery. For example, after the probability variation or time reduction reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) less than the above-mentioned maximum number of fluctuations (here, 100 times), each change of the special symbol is performed until the maximum number of fluctuations is reached. A lottery (lottery to end a specific game) is executed to determine whether or not to end the probability change and time reduction. Then, when the specific game end lottery is won, the probability change and the time reduction are ended, and the game state from the next fluctuation returns to the normal state without the probability change and the time reduction.

Further, it is possible not only to execute both the probability change and the time saving, but also to execute only one of them in the specific game. For example, depending on the type of jackpot that was won, it is possible to give only the time reduction and not the probability change, or to not give the time reduction and give only the probability change.
<< Game for facilitating ball entry >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned ball entry facilitation game will be described. In this ball entry facilitation game, the function related to the ordinary electric accessory is set in the player's favor, and the opening mode of the second start winning opening 63 can be easier to accept the game ball than usual. is there. When the ball entry facilitation game is executed, the second is determined by the control mode such as the time reduction related to the normal symbol, the probability fluctuation related to the normal symbol, the opening extension related to the normal electric accessory, and the combination of these control modes. The ease of entering the ball into the starting winning opening 63 is enhanced, and a state in which the ball is easily entered is formed. In relation to this "easy entry game" and the above-mentioned "base", "electric support", etc., the following are "high base", "high base state", "low base", "low base state", " Terms such as "non-electric support" are used. In the following, the "low base state" corresponds to the "non-electric support state", and the "high base state" corresponds to the "electric support state".

Among the various control modes described above in the normal symbol, the time reduction related to the normal symbol is a control mode in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability fluctuation related to the normal symbol is the winning probability of the normal symbol. Is a control mode (probability change related to a normal symbol) that improves the value from the normal state. Further, the opening extension related to the ordinary electric accessory is a control mode in which the opening time of the second start winning opening 63 is opened (long opening) longer than the opening (short opening) in the normal time (during a non-specific game). is there.

As described above, the ball entry facilitation game during the specific game uses the three functions of shortening the time of the normal symbol, fluctuating the probability of the open lottery, and extending the opening of the normal electric accessory to enter the second start winning opening 63. Increase ball ease. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or two of these three functions may be used to enhance the ease of entering the second starting winning opening 63. Further, at least one of the three functions may be switched between the period in which the function is performed and the period in which the function is not performed, depending on the game state.

The duration of such a ball-enhancing game can be determined based on a short period of time related to the special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the ball entry facilitation game is continued during the time reduction related to the special symbol, and the ball entry facilitation game ends when the time reduction related to the special symbol is completed. Then, in this case, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation pattern) in which the symbol variation is started after the time reduction of the special symbol is completed is provided for the normal time (during non-specific game). It is possible to be determined from the fluctuation patterns.
<Main production of pachinko machines>
<< Basic display mode of production design >>

Next, various effects executed by the sub-main board 301 and the sub-sub-board 302 based on the command from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be described. Then, here, first, the basic display mode of the said effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B) will be described.

The effect symbol 190 is variablely displayed on the effect display device 60 as the special symbol is variablely displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 8A). Further, the effect symbol 190 is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8B) as the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53.

The stop symbol displayed when the effect symbol 190 is stopped is composed of a combination of three symbols, the left effect symbol 190a, the middle effect symbol 190b, and the right effect symbol 190c. Then, when the result of the big hit lottery on the main board 102 is a big hit, a combination of three doublets, such as "777" and "555", is used as a stop symbol representing the big hit. Is displayed. If the result of the big hit lottery is wrong, one or all of the production symbols may be different from the other production symbols, such as "767", "928", and "331". The symbol 190 is stopped and displayed.

Here, the "stop symbol" and the "stop symbol" in the present embodiment mean that the three effect symbols 190 are "fixed stop". That is, even if the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 while maintaining a combination of, for example, "767" and "928", that alone is "fixed stop". It does not correspond to what you did. Then, the state in which the effect symbol 190 has not reached the "fixed stop" while maintaining the combination can be referred to as the "temporary stop" state.

As a display mode of such "temporary stop", for example, a state in which the effect symbol 190 vibrates (sways) in small steps can be exemplified. Then, a mode of temporary stop in which the effect symbol 190 is swaying in small steps while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a mode of "sway fluctuation" or the like. Examples of the shaking mode of the effect symbol 190 in this "temporary stop" include vertical or horizontal linear movement and horizontal rotational movement, and the movement range can be exemplified by about several millimeters.

Further, as the display mode of the above-mentioned "fixed stop", a state in which all the effect symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining the combination can be exemplified after the temporary stop state. Further, at the time of this "fixed stop", it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the fixed stop has been performed. Then, as an effect indicating that the confirmed display has been performed, the fixed stop state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), and the fixed and stopped effect symbols 190a to 190c are in a state in which a special effect is added. (Design effect), lighting the LED (lamp) provided on the center decoration 64, and the like can be exemplified.

Here, as a symbol effect, each effect symbol 190a to 190c is illuminated only momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds), and a bright spot is circulated once or a plurality of times around each effect symbol 190a to 190c. It is possible to adopt various modes such as enlarging or reducing the symbols 190a to 190c, moving the effect symbols 190a to 190c by about several millimeters, and returning them to their original positions.

Further, in the above-mentioned "reach" display mode, the effect symbol maintaining the combination of reach may be displayed in the above-mentioned "temporary stop" mode. Then, after the reach display by this "temporary stop", the symbol (here, the middle effect symbol 190b) that has been variablely displayed constitutes an out-of-order combination (out-of-reach combination) and "temporarily stops" to perform the combination. It is possible to exemplify an effect such that "fixed stop" is performed and the variable display ends while maintaining the effect. Further, from the state in which the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are "temporarily stopped" by the combination of the detached reach, the middle effect symbol 190b resumes the fluctuation and the reach effect is highly reliable (reliability related to the jackpot). It can also be illustrated as a production (second half reach) that develops into something with a relatively high degree.

The scroll display mode of the effect symbol 190 is not limited to the above-mentioned vertical scrolling, and various display modes can be adopted. Then, as another display mode, for example, a side-scrolling mode in the horizontal direction (right to left, etc.) or a left effect symbol 190a to a right effect symbol 190c are individually rotated (rotated) around the vertical axis. , An example of a rotation mode in which a variable display is performed. Further, for example, the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are expanded in the display area 194 from the rear to the front, that is, from the back to the front of the screen along a straight or curved (turning) trajectory. A display mode such as sequentially paying out can also be exemplified. Further, it is also possible to adopt a scroll display mode in which the effect symbol from the rear to the front descends from the upper side to the lower front side.

Further, the scrolling mode is not limited to adopting any one of the various modes as described above, and for example, when a predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined scrolling mode is switched to another scrolling mode. It is also possible. Further, for a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to make the scroll mode different for each effect mode.

Further, in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a display mode in which the combination of the effect symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle stage in the vertical direction of the display area 194 is exemplified, and the effective line is in the horizontal direction. There is only one line. However, the number of effective lines is not limited to this, and for example, the number of effective lines can be set to 2 or 5.

Further, in FIG. 8B, the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are simplified and shown only by the numbers in a predetermined font, but the effect symbol 190 is illustrated in FIG. 33 (b). In addition, a combination of a part meaning a predetermined symbol such as a number (element symbol which is the above-mentioned symbol element effect design) and a part consisting of a design representing other than the predetermined symbol (element symbol which is a non-symbol element effect design). It is possible to configure by. As a part consisting of a pattern representing a symbol other than a predetermined symbol, various design drawings, figure paintings, and combinations thereof can be exemplified, and various design drawings and figure paintings combined with the symbol can be shown as a moving image. It is also possible to. In the example of FIG. 33 (b), a heart pattern is adopted as a pattern representing a symbol other than a predetermined symbol.
<< Example of production pattern >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned production pattern will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state associated with the variation pattern determined by the main board 102. Further, the effect pattern defines the mode of the effect including the effect symbol 190. More specifically, the effect pattern defines an effect process such as a change process from the start of change to the stop of the change for the selected effect symbol 190, a background displayed in combination with the effect symbol 190, and story development. There is. And, there are some production patterns corresponding to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

Of these, when the effect pattern of "with reach" is executed, the effect display device 60 performs a reach effect that becomes a big hit if one more effect symbol (here, the middle effect symbol 190b) is prepared. Then, when the result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the special symbol is a big hit, the doublet display such as "777" or "333" according to the type of the big hit is performed by the effect symbol 190 whose confirmation has been stopped. Further, when the result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the special symbol is out of order, for example, a combination indicating the out of place such as "767" or "515" is performed by the effect symbol 190 which has been confirmed and stopped.

Further, when the "no reach" effect pattern is executed, a non-reach combination in which the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c are not a reach combination, such as "928" and "331", is used. It is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been fixed and stopped.

Some of these production patterns have various long and short fluctuation times, and in particular, the fluctuation pattern of "with reach" includes a fluctuation time of several minutes. In this embodiment, "no reach (about 3 to 10 seconds)" and "normal reach (10 to 20 seconds)" in the fluctuation pattern related to the above-mentioned special symbol (see FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c)). Degree) ”and“ Super reach (reach with high reliability of big hits) (about 30 seconds to 2 minutes) ”are provided with a non-reach effect pattern, a normal reach effect pattern, and a super reach effect pattern. Then, for example, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one variation pattern in these effect patterns, and the number of effect patterns is wider than that of the above-mentioned variation pattern. Further, "super reach" can be paraphrased as "SP (special) reach".
<< Hold effect display related to special symbols >>

Next, the hold display (hold effect display) related to the special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. At the bottom of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a first hold number display unit 196 showing the number of hold of the winning / failing lottery value in the first game, and a first The second hold number display unit 197 indicating the hold number of the winning / failing lottery value in the two games is displayed. In addition, although each hold display is represented by a perfect circle here for simplification of explanation and illustration, the hold display may be performed by other combinations of shapes and colors, character images, animations, and the like.

In this embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is performed on the first hold number display unit 196 described above. Furthermore, as the number of holds increases, a hold display is added. Then, when the number of holds reaches the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 8A, four hold displays are performed in the first hold number display unit 196.

Further, the hold display on the first hold number display unit 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first hold number display unit 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the rightmost portion of the first hold number display unit 196 as viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. Then, a second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Further, in the following, the hold display performed from the first display position to the fourth display position will be referred to as "ho 1", "ho 2", "ho 3", and "ho 4", respectively.

For example, in the effect display device 60, a hold occurs in a situation where the effect symbol 190 related to the first game is being performed and one hold display is not performed on the first hold number display unit 196. Then, the hold display is performed at the first display position at the right end (the position of "holding 1" described above). Then, at this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been performed yet, and that "Ho 2" to "Ho 4" have not occurred. If a hold is further generated in the situation where the "hold 1" is generated in this way, the display related to the held hold is performed at the position of the "hold 2" to the left of the "hold 1". Then, in a situation where "Ho 1" and "Ho 2" are displayed and "Ho 3" and "Ho 4" are not displayed, if a further hold occurs, "Ho 3" is displayed according to the number of holds that have occurred. And "Ho 4" are displayed.

Then, if the variation display executed when the "protection 1" occurs is completed and the other variation start conditions related to the first game are also satisfied, the above-mentioned reserved storage information related to the "protection 1" is stored. At the stage of being digested, the hold display of "Take 1" moves to the right side of the first hold number display unit 196. The fluctuation information display unit 195 is provided on the right side portion of the first reserved number display unit 196. The fluctuation information display unit 195 is an area for displaying information (the fluctuation information) related to the fluctuation display being executed at that time. That is, the hold display of "Holding 1" moves to the change information display unit 195 and changes to the change information display 198 when the change display related to the corresponding hold storage information is executed.

Here, when moving the hold display of "Ho 1" to the fluctuation information display unit 195, the display elements such as the size, color, and form of the item may be changed. In the examples of FIGS. 8A and 8B, the size is increased when the hold display of "Maintenance 1" is changed to the fluctuation information display 198.

When the hold display in the “hold 1” is moved to the fluctuation information display unit 195 as described above, the standby order of the subsequent hold display is moved up, and the “hold 2” is shifted to the position of the “hold 1”. Further, when "ho 3" or "ho 4" exists, "ho 3" shifts to the position of "ho 2" and "ho 4" shifts to the position of "ho 3". Then, if a further hold occurs in such a situation, a new "hold 4" is generated, and the number of holds reaches the upper limit. Further, if a new hold does not occur, the hold display is shifted with the start of the next variable display, and the waiting order of each hold is raised.

In a broad sense, it can be regarded as a hold effect, including a state in which the hold display in "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" is changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195. Not limited to this, the hold display in "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" is set as the hold display, and the state changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display. It is also possible.

In addition, if the variable display related to the effect symbol 190 is not performed and the number of holdings is 0 and there is a ball in the first start winning opening 62, the display of "maintenance 1" is not performed (or is displayed for a moment). ), The fluctuation information display 198 is directly performed on the fluctuation information display unit 195. Then, only in such a case, it is possible to handle such that the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display.

Subsequently, the above-described second hold number display unit 197 will be described, but the same points as the first hold number display unit 196 will be omitted. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second reserved number display unit 197 is located on the opposite side of the first reserved number display unit 196 (on the right side when viewed from the player) with the above-mentioned fluctuation information display unit 195 interposed therebetween. ), The relationships of "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" are arranged symmetrically in a color different from that of the first reserved image.

In addition, the hold display can be performed in various modes according to the gaming state. For example, when the probability of the big hit lottery is a normal probability and a high probability, and when the different production modes are controlled, the mode of holding display may be different from each other.

Further, the positional relationship between the first hold number display unit 196, the second hold number display unit 197, and the fluctuation information display unit 195 is not limited to the above, and the second game is performed as in the present embodiment. For pachinko gaming machines of the type that display fluctuations of special symbols and effect symbols 190 in the order of occurrence of starting prizes related to the first game and the second game, instead of executing the game with priority given to one game, the variation information display unit is used. Eight hold displays may be arranged on the left side of 195.
<< Hold look-ahead effect related to special symbols >>

Next, a hold look-ahead effect, which is one of the advance notice effects (look-ahead effects) related to the special symbol, will be described. This hold look-ahead effect is an effect executed based on the above-mentioned hold storage information (first special figure hold storage information or second hold storage information). Further, in the hold look-ahead effect, a reach or a big hit occurs for a hold that is digested after the effect performed by using the effect symbol 190 or the like at that time by using the above-mentioned advance information notification function. It is executed as a production that suggests the expectation of doing.

For example, the hold display generated at the position of "hold 3" in the first hold number display unit 196 described above is a green hold display, unlike the display (for example, blue) which is the basic display mode in which the hold change is not made. It is shown that the degree of expectation such as the occurrence of reach is higher than that in the case of the normal blue aspect. Then, in addition to the coloring of blue and green, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, rainbow, and predetermined pattern are provided, and the expectation of a big hit in the order of yellow, red, gold, rainbow, and predetermined pattern rather than green. The production is such that it shows that the degree is high.

Here, as the display mode of the above-mentioned "predetermined pattern", an animal pattern such as a giraffe, a display mode including a predetermined character image, and the like can be exemplified. In addition to the coloring and pattern of the hold display, it is also possible to adopt items other than a perfect circle, a person image, and the like. Further, it is also possible to perform a look-ahead effect by combining the above-mentioned various display modes with a mode in which blinking or light emission is performed. Further, the hold that hits the look-ahead effect including the hold look-ahead effect can be referred to as, for example, "trigger hold".

The look-ahead effect related to the hold as described above may also be performed in the second game. Then, with respect to the second game, in addition to the basic color (orange), it is possible to provide display modes such as red, gold, rainbow, and a predetermined pattern. Further, as the hold display related to the second game, it is also possible to adopt an item other than a perfect circle shape, a person image, or the like.

Further, the look-ahead effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be referred to as "hold change" or the like. Then, such "hold change" includes a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the hold occurrence, a display mode change at the timing after the hold occurrence, and the like. is there.

Among these, as those indicating the change in the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold, for example, the hold occurs, the hold display is started, the hold is digested, and the hold display is, for example, "Hold 2". It is possible to exemplify such a thing that the hold display changes while proceeding to "Ho 1". Then, for example, when the hold occurs, the hold is displayed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the position of "hold 3", and when the hold is moved to the position of "hold 1", another color such as green is displayed. And so on.

Further, in both the first game and the second game, when the fluctuation information display 198 is displayed, the hold display is changed from the basic color to a display mode such as red, gold, rainbow color, a predetermined pattern, or true. It may change to a display mode such as an item other than a circular shape or a person image to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, as the control mode related to the pending change as described above, the following can be exemplified. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) is performed to determine an effect pattern (hold change pattern) of the hold change. A hold change pattern table is used for this hold change pattern lottery, and in this hold change pattern table, there is a hold change, and when the hold change is executed (when there is a hold change), what kind of timing is used? Matters related to the determination of the effect pattern, such as what kind of display mode is to be executed, are stipulated. Further, as the pending change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are defined.

Further, when there are a plurality of holds that have hit the hold change in "Ho 1" to "Ho 4", it is possible to cancel one of the hold look-ahead effects. More specifically, for example, when "Ho 4" occurs, the hold related to "Ho 4" hits the hold change pattern that changes to green, and any of the holds that have occurred earlier is As long as the hold change pattern that changes to rainbow color is applied, the hold related to the above-mentioned "ho 4" can be exemplified by canceling the hold change and not executing it.

Further, for example, when "Holding 4" occurs as in the above example, the holding related to "Holding 4" hits the holding change pattern that changes to rainbow color, and all the holdings that have occurred earlier are held. However, if the hold does not change up to the rainbow color and only changes to green, etc., the hold change that has occurred earlier can be canceled and not executed. It should be noted that, when performing the hold change, it is also possible to execute an effect suggesting that the hold change is performed (sometimes referred to as a “hold change suggestion effect”), and this point will be described later separately.
<< Continuous notice of special symbols >>

Next, as another pattern of the look-ahead effect, continuous notice (continuous effect) related to the special symbol will be described. There are genuine and pseudo continuous notices, and among these, the genuine continuous notice means that a continuous notice effect is performed over multiple variable displays related to the special symbol. ing. Further, the pseudo continuous notice means that an intermittent notice effect (pseudo continuous notice) is performed such that there are a plurality of changes in the special symbol for one variation display related to the special symbol.

As the above-mentioned "continuous notice", for example, the character who is the main character in the story of the production moves to a different room in sequence aiming at the room to be finally reached for each change related to the special symbol. Such things can be exemplified. In addition, as another aspect of "continuous notice", the character who is the main character fights against a different enemy and wins for each change related to the special symbol, aiming for the final goal enemy. Can also be exemplified.

Further, the above-mentioned genuine continuous notice (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "continuous notice") can be performed based on the advance notification information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. More specifically, for example, based on the advance notification information received when the hold of "Ho 3" occurs, the sub-main board 301 is used as an effect pattern corresponding to the variation display related to the next and subsequent special symbols. It is possible to select the content including the continuous notice over the three variable displays.

Then, when the hold for one time is exhausted and the hold of the above-mentioned "ho 3" is shifted to the position of "ho 2", the first one of the selected continuous notice-related production patterns The effect pattern related to the notice is executed. Furthermore, when the hold is sequentially digested and the hold display moves from "ho 2" to "ho 1", the second notice of the three times is executed, and the change information is displayed from "ho 1". When moving to section 195, the final third notice is executed.

In addition, in the sub-main board 301, the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation display executed at the time when the above-mentioned "holding 3" is held, and the "holding 2" or "holding 1" occurring before that. It is also possible to confirm the pending storage information. That is, when the above-mentioned "ho 3" is held, information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with high jackpot reliability is executed or a jackpot is generated among various information already stored. If there is information indicating that the item is to be performed, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern related to the continuous advance notice selected when the hold of "Ho 3" occurs. In addition, depending on the degree of expectation of holding for "Ho 3", continuous notice is not given immediately from the next fluctuation, but after waiting for 1 change, the change of "Ho 1" and the trigger hold at the time of digestion, which is a look-ahead mode, 2 In some cases, it may be a continuous notice that spans fluctuations.

Further, as the above-mentioned pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter, may be referred to as "pseudo continuous notice"), the reach display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in the effect pattern related to the one-time variable display of the special symbol. Such things, things in which the characters repeat actions multiple times, things in which the effect symbol 190 is temporarily stopped and re-variated, and the like can be exemplified.

The contents of the continuous notice as described above are merely examples, and various kinds of contents other than those described above can be adopted as the contents of the continuous notice.
<< Directed design related to normal design >>

Next, the production related to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol will be described. In this embodiment, the effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the effect related to the ordinary symbol as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. Then, in the case of displaying the effect of the ordinary symbol in this way, it is conceivable that the effect symbol is displayed to such an extent that, for example, the off-off and the hit type can be distinguished.

Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, it is provided with a relatively large display body and a display body smaller than this (may be a plurality of display bodies). It is possible. Then, a large display body can be referred to as, for example, a "main display body" or a "main liquid crystal", and a small display body can be referred to as, for example, a "sub display body" or a "sub liquid crystal". Further, when the relatively small display body as described above is provided, the effect symbol (199) related to the normal symbol may be displayed on, for example, a small display body. Further, for example, an LED indicator lamp in which two sets may be provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as an effect display device related to a normal symbol.

Further, when performing an effect using the effect symbol related to the normal symbol, the hold effect display related to the normal symbol can be performed as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is composed of a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect hold display related to a normal symbol is displayed, for example, a small display. It may be displayed on the body. In addition, for example, an LED indicator lamp in which two sets are provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, thereby displaying the number of pending effects related to the ordinary symbols "1" to "4". May be good.
<< Production related to limited frequency pattern >>

Next, the effect related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as "limited frequency pattern effect") will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as a part of the above-mentioned effect pattern. Further, the limited frequency pattern effect is an effect set so as to easily appear in a predetermined gaming state in response to a variation pattern determined in a specific period by the pattern determining means of the main board. The content of this limited frequency pattern effect is an effect content that shows a specific tendency, and as the content of the limited frequency pattern effect, for example, in a specific variation during a time-saving game, a predetermined variation pattern is used on the main board. It is possible to exemplify something that is determined and that always generates a highly reliable reach as a production.

In addition, as a game situation in which a limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, at the start of the game, immediately after a predetermined effect pattern is executed (for example, immediately after a small hit or a large hit without a ball), or during a predetermined effect mode (probability change, (During the time saving game mode), immediately after the end of the special game, etc. can be exemplified. In addition to these, as a game situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, the number of holds related to the first game (or the second game) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4), or the hold is An example can be given when it does not exist. Further, in the situation where the limited frequency pattern effect is executed, the limited frequency table provided in advance according to the situation at that time is used, and the effect pattern to be executed is selected from the limited frequency pattern defined in the limited frequency table. It is supposed to be selected.
<< Production using operation buttons >>

Next, an effect using the above-mentioned operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) (hereinafter referred to as “button effect”) will be described. The operation button 22 is pressed and operated by the player when the button effect is executed, and exerts a function of giving the player the feeling that he / she is participating in the effect of the game or the winning / losing lottery. is there. As the button effect, for example, in the variable display process of the effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B), in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, together with the symbol of the operation button 22, "Push" and "continuous hitting" are performed. It is possible to exemplify the display of a guide prompting an operation, such as characters such as "Seyo" and "Press and hold", or a moving image of an indicator indicating the remaining time.

Further, as the button effect, when the player operates the operation button 22 according to the above-mentioned guide display, an effect in which the character makes a comment or an effect in which the ally character attacks the enemy character can be exemplified. Further, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect member (601 to 603, etc.) is activated to notify that the reach is reached. Further, a button effect may be performed during the reach effect. In that case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect member (601 to 603, etc.) is activated to arouse expectations for a big hit. Can also be exemplified.

Further, regarding the above-mentioned operation button 22, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally invalid, but the operation of the operation button 22 is valid during the button production. The button operation valid period is a preset fixed time.

As the operation input device such as the operation button 22, various other forms can be adopted. For example, an automobile operation handle, an aircraft operation lever, and a model of a character related to the production content. It is also possible to use a (figure) with a touch sensor added. It is also possible to install an operation button and an operation lever in the form of an operation lever, and use them properly according to the situation such as the content of the production.

Further, as described above, the cross key 96 (FIG. 21) is provided in the vicinity of the operation button 22, and the operation button 22 may be used as a decision key or the like in a situation where an environment setting or the like is performed. Then, in this embodiment, the effect operation using the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 is performed in a situation where the effect display device 60 is performing a variable display such as the effect symbol 190 or a situation where the variable display is not performed. May be done.
<< Production when a big hit occurs >>

Next, the effect when a big hit occurs will be described. When a big hit occurs, the production at the start of the special game (big hit start demo), the production during the special game (round production), the production at the end of the final round (win end demo), and the production at the end of the special game There is a production (demonstration of the end of the big hit). Here, the production of the above-mentioned jackpot start demo is a production of a period during which the attacker (big winning opening) is maintained from the start of execution of the jackpot game (special game) to the start of execution of the first round (unit game). The above-mentioned jackpot end demo is produced during the period from the end of the final round (unit game) execution to the end of the jackpot game (special game) execution while the attacker (big prize opening) is closed. It can be said that it is a production.

When the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is confirmed and stopped, a display indicating that a big hit is started is displayed along with a sound such as a fanfare. As a display indicating that the big hit is started, the display of the big hit start demo screen shown in FIG. 38A can be exemplified. Further, it is possible to exemplify a content that executes a right-handed guidance effect as a hitting instruction during a special game and guides the player to perform a right-handed hit by increasing the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20. Further, as a display of the content for guiding the right-handed strike, it is possible to display a message such as "Turn the steering wheel to the right" in the right-handed guide display area 383 of FIG. 38 (a).

Here, the production content at the start of the big hit may be different between the first hit (big hit on the low base) and the consecutive villa (big hit on the high base). Specifically, a display such as "Big hit start!" May be displayed at the time of the first hit, and a display such as "Big hit continuous!" May be displayed at the time of hitting the consecutive villas. In addition, for right-handed guidance, the message "Turn the steering wheel to the right" is displayed at the first hit, but at Renso, such a message is not displayed or a different display (simply "right-handed"). Large characters are displayed for a short time, etc.). In this way, the jackpot start demo production at the time of the consecutive villas may be shorter than the jackpot start demo production at the time of the first hit. In that case, of course, the jackpot start demo time is longer than at the time of the first hit. It will be shorter when you are in a villa. Similarly, the time value of the big hit end demo production (big hit start demo time) may be shorter at the time of consecutive villas than at the time of the first hit. Also, regarding the touch production that can be performed during the big hit start demonstration, which will be described later, the content of the production and whether or not the execution of the production is permitted based on the case of the first hit and the case of the consecutive villas, or the number of consecutive villas. Can also be associated with.

As the production during the above-mentioned special game, a moving image having contents that cannot be seen unless the player wins a big hit can be exemplified. Further, at this time, a predetermined music is output from the speaker 21 (see FIG. 1) described above. Furthermore, as a video during the special game, for example, a picture of a predetermined character in a graphic novel adopted for the production of the pachinko game machine 10 fighting against a rival enemy, or a state of enjoying a jerk is drawn. Can be illustrated. Here, (FIG. 38 (b)) exemplifies a scene of a video in which two women fight against an enemy together as a video during a special game.

It should be noted that the switching of rounds during the special game is, for example, "1R", "2R", ..., "15R", "1 round", "2 rounds", ... It is possible to notify by the display such as. Further, as a part of the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to display the number of times the big hit occurs when the big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hits are continuous.

In the display example of FIG. 38 (b), a hold number display area 367 is displayed at the lower part of the screen to distinguish the hold numbers of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 38B, the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the round number display area 368, and the count number display area 369 are displayed. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 38 (b), the number of consecutive villas related to a plurality of big hit games is displayed in the upper right part of the screen by displaying such as "probability change 1st time" or "acquisition number: 195 pieces". , The number of prize balls won in the consecutive villas is displayed.

Here, instead of displaying only the prize balls (by entering the large winning opening (90)) due to the game during the round, the number of winning prize balls is not displayed, but the same launch position as the large winning opening (90) ( A prize ball based on a ball entering a general prize opening (sign omitted) arranged in the launch direction) may also be displayed as a target for displaying the number of prize balls won. In addition, when a so-called over-winning (a ball that exceeds the specified count number in one round for a large winning opening) occurs, which is an excess winning amount, an effect that suggests or notifies the occurrence (for example, "Ya" Sound output such as "Tane!" Or display such as "Nice!" In the production display) may be performed.

Further, as the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to perform a specific effect (a specific effect during hitting) as shown in FIGS. 38 (c) and 39 (a) to (c). 38 (c) and 39 (a) to (c) exemplify the hitting specific effect screens A to D. These hitting specific production screens A to D are displayed as an opportunity to change the story development, or are inserted as a turning point of the production when the number of rounds is notified or the promotion effect to the probability change is performed during the big hit game. It can be used for such purposes as. The meanings and contents of the display examples of FIGS. 38 (c) and 39 (a) to 39 (c) will be described later.

Subsequently, as the above-mentioned production after the special game, those related to the result of the production content during the special game can be exemplified. More specifically, it is possible to exemplify the content in which the winner expresses emotions according to the result of the battle between the characters. The production after such a special game can also be referred to as an ending production.

Further, as the effect after the special game, the one that additionally displays the number of consecutive big hits, the one that displays the number of prize balls acquired by the player by the special game at that time, and the like can be exemplified. It is also possible to add and display the number of times a big hit occurs when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hits are continuous. Further, regarding the succession of big hits, when the number of times of big hits reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern that has not been selected before that.

FIG. 37 (c) shows an example of screen display at the time of the big hit end demonstration. At the time of this big hit end demonstration, the characters such as "end" indicating the end of the big hit game are displayed. Further, the lower message display area 364 is displayed at the lower part of the screen, and the message "touch the handle to move to the variable standby screen and turn on the effect button to move to the customized screen ()" is displayed in a flowing manner. In this jackpot end demo screen, it is also possible to display the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game or during the consecutive villas. In the example of FIG. 37 (c), "big hit + 1 time" and "number of acquisitions: 1500" are displayed in the lower left part of the screen.

In addition, when the type of jackpot includes a jackpot that does not accompany a probability change, the notification of whether or not the probability change will occur after the end of the special game should not be notified during the special game or until the end of the special game. Is also possible.

For example, when a total of 10 rounds of special games are played, the player is not notified until the end of the 8th round whether or not the player has won the probability change, and after the end of the 8th round, the probability change is performed. In the case of hitting, it is possible to adopt an effect or a control mode in which an effect to that effect (a specific effect during hitting) is performed over one or a plurality of rounds.

Similarly, in a pachinko gaming machine that includes a jackpot that does not accompany a probability change, when a gaming ball is detected in a predetermined area at a predetermined timing such as before the start of the special game, during the special game, or at the end of the special game. It is also possible to adopt an effect or control mode such that is probable.

In this case, for example, a ball entry device having a game ball detection area (referred to as “V ball entry device” here) is added to a portion below the large winning opening in the game area 52 (see FIG. 1). To be provided. Further, at a predetermined timing such as at the end of a special game, the V-ball entry device is set to a state in which the game ball can be accepted, and when the game ball is detected by the V-ball entry device in this state, the subsequent probability state is changed. , It is controlled so that it is in a probabilistic state over a predetermined period. Then, when the game ball does not enter the V entry device or when the game ball does not enter the predetermined area in the V entry device, the subsequent probability state is controlled so as not to become a probabilistic state. It is conceivable to do.

In addition, it is possible to give the probability change by entering the ball only as an effect. That is, when a jackpot with a certain change is won in the jackpot lottery, the V-ball entry device is set to a state in which a game ball can be accepted at a predetermined timing. Then, if a distribution mechanism is provided in the V entry device and a big hit with a probability change is hit in advance, the game ball that has entered the V entry device is guided to the probability change area, and the player changes the probability. Perform a production to the effect that you have acquired. Further, when the jackpot without probability change is hit in advance, it is conceivable to guide the game ball to the non-probability (normal) area and execute the effect that the player has acquired the probability change.

Subsequently, as the above-mentioned production after the special game, those related to the result of the production content during the special game can be exemplified. More specifically, it is possible to exemplify the content in which the winner expresses emotions according to the result of the battle between the characters. The production after such a special game can also be referred to as an ending production.

Further, as the effect after the special game, the one that additionally displays the number of consecutive big hits, the one that displays the number of prize balls acquired by the player by the special game at that time, and the like can be exemplified. It is also possible to add and display the number of times a big hit occurs when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hits are continuous. Further, regarding the succession of big hits, when the number of times of big hits reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern that has not been selected before that.

Furthermore, when a small hit occurs, the effect of notifying the occurrence of the small hit is not performed, and during the game after the small hit occurs, it is the same as in the normal time, and it is not possible to distinguish whether or not the probability is changing. It is conceivable to produce the content.
<Various concrete production examples>
<< Production by superimposing multiple production members >>

Next, various specific effects that can be carried out in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with examples. First, it is possible to perform an effect by displaying the effect display device 60, displaying the light guide plate 88 described above, and superimposing the movable effect member. This type of effect is a complex effect by locating the movable effect member in front of the effect display device 60 and combining the display content of the effect display device 60 with the light decoration and movement of the movable effect member.

For example, in a state where one of the movable effect members protrudes in front of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, at least a part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 can be seen outside the movable effect member. For example, when an image of a flame burning is displayed on the effect display device 60, a combination effect in which the movable effect member performs light decoration or operation is executed in front of the flame. Further, in the light guide plate 88, for example, by performing an effect of blinking a flame pattern or an effect of blinking a ripple-like pattern, the difference in perspective between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60 can be obtained. It can exert a visual effect.

Further, in this state, by executing the effect by the movable effect member between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60, the state of the movable effect member and the image of the effect display device 60 can be displayed on the light guide plate 88. It can be visually recognized by the player while being partially obstructed. Furthermore, by synthesizing changes in the pattern display before and after the movable effect member, a complicated situation display can be superimposed on the movable effect member, and the environment in which the movable effect member is placed can be expressed in a complicated manner. ..

As a result, more complicated effects can be performed and the effects can be diversified by the limited configuration of the light guide plate 88, the movable effect member, and the effect display device 60. Even when the light guide plate 88 is changed to, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display body, a part of the transmissive liquid crystal display body can be visually recognized by a movable effect member behind or a part of the display content of the effect display device 60. By setting the transmission state to the extent possible, it is possible to perform an effect by superimposing as in the case of the light guide plate 88.

Further, as a mode of using the light guide plate 88, the transmissive liquid crystal display body or the like (referred to as the light guide plate 88 or the like here), a mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 or the like and a mode of combining with the effect display device 60 are adopted. It is possible. In the above-mentioned "mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 or the like", a color display is performed by using most of the display surface of the light guide plate 88 or the like to make a predetermined image stand out, and the display content of the effect display device 60 behind the light guide plate 88 or the like is displayed. This is a display mode that prevents the player's consciousness from facing as much as possible.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "mode in combination with the effect display device 60", the ratio of the area of the portion of the light guide plate 88 or the like where the color display is performed is suppressed to a predetermined degree, and the display of the effect display device 60 behind is suppressed. This is a display mode in which the player is directed to the content, and the display of the light guide plate 88 or the like and the display of the effect display device 60 are combined to show the player an effect. Then, in a predetermined case, the effect in the "mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 or the like" is executed, and in other predetermined cases, the effect in the "mode in combination with the effect display device 60" is executed. , Etc. are possible.
<< Production using hold display >>

Subsequently, various productions using the above-mentioned hold display can be exemplified. For example, a hold change suggestion effect suggesting that a hold change is performed is exemplified, and the change information display 198 of the change information display unit 195 shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b) is temporarily deleted, and the change is made. The information display unit 195 displays character information (character state transition suggestion information) that suggests that the reserved color changes and the degree of expectation increases, for example, "color change?". Then, after displaying such state transition suggestion information, the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 may change to something that means a high degree of expectation, such as red or rainbow color. To do.

It is also possible to display the above-mentioned display such as "color change?" As one of the roulette eyes or one of the rotating drums (reels). For example, information displays such as "no change", "color change?", "Red", and "rainbow" are adopted as the roulette eyes and the design of the rotating drum, and the roulette and rotation are displayed on the fluctuation information display unit 195. Display the drum object. Then, in the fluctuation information display unit 195, the display of "no change", "color change?", "Red", and "rainbow" is sequentially changed, and the subsequent fluctuation information display is performed in a manner corresponding to the stopped information. It is conceivable that 198 will be done. It is also possible to display an object of a roulette wheel or a rotating drum without erasing the fluctuation information display 198.

Further, as another aspect of the effect using the hold display, when the hold change is performed in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), the hold is held. It is conceivable to proactively notify that a change has occurred or that a pending change will occur immediately afterwards, for example, by displaying pending change information such as "pending change", "red holding", or "rainbow hold". Be done. Here, such display of the hold change information may be performed at the center of the display area 194 in the effect display device 60, or the hold change is displayed in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold change display unit 197. It may be done in the vicinity of the hold display.

As described above, one or a plurality of types of hold change suggestion effects that suggest that the hold change is performed are provided, and the rate at which the hold change is made and the hold change are made depending on whether or not the hold change suggestion effect is executed and the type. It is also preferable that the degree of change at the time (for example, the rate at which the reserved color changes from blue to red differs between type A and type B) is different. In addition, when there are a plurality of hold displays and a hold change can be performed on a plurality of hold displays, it is not possible to know which hold change will be performed at the start of the hold change suggestion effect. Also, if it is configured in this way, it is possible to improve the interest from the viewpoint of whether the previously changed hold changes further or the unchanged hold changes.

Further, when the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the timing of the hold change can be various timings during the symbol change. For example, when the hold change suggestion effect uses an area dedicated to the hold change suggestion or an image object, a plurality of start / end may occur at an arbitrary timing that does not overlap with the fixed stop period of the decorative symbol (effect symbol). You can set the timing.

On the other hand, when the hold change suggestion effect is not dedicated to the hold change suggestion and is performed in conjunction with the change effect of the decorative symbol, for example, a pseudo decorative symbol suggesting a hold change is used by using the display area of the decorative symbol. It is possible to execute a hold change suggestion effect for displaying (for example, "hold change symbol"). Then, in this case, it is possible to set the timing at which the symbols in one or a plurality of rows are temporarily stopped and the timing at which the stop symbols are announced.

In addition to the various hold change timings described here, the hold color can be changed at the start or shift of the hold display.
<Various commands sent from the main board to the sub-main board>

Next, the main commands of various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be described. First, the command transmission timing is as follows: during the initial screen display, during the customer waiting demo (standby demo), when the special symbol symbol changes, when the special symbol symbol is confirmed, when the special symbol symbol is confirmed, when the jackpot start demo There are times when the big hit medium and large prize openings are opened, when the big hit medium and large prize openings are closed, when the hit end demonstration is performed, and when the big hit end demo is completed. Of these, the initial screen display is the period from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on until the customer waiting demonstration is started and the steady state is entered. In addition, a command is transmitted in any case when the start prize is won, when the power is restored, and when an error is detected. Further, the command transmission is executed even when the RWM is cleared.

Among these, the commands for clearing the RWM include commands for initializing the effect display, initializing the effect LED, and commands for various errors. The effect display initialization command is for displaying a predetermined effect symbol on the effect display device 60. The effect LED initialization command is to turn on a part of the game effect lamp when the communication is normal. The various error commands are for displaying an effect according to the error state.

As a command for the customer waiting demo, there is a customer waiting demo command. This customer waiting demo command is for setting the effect display device 60 and the game effect lamp for the customer waiting demo and erasing the sound.

The commands at the start of the symbol change of the special symbol are the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2, the communication inspection 1, the communication inspection 2, the number of effects A to Z, the effect selection states 0 to 2, the variation additional information, and the symbol 1 effect. There are commands for pattern, symbol 2 effect pattern, symbol 1 character effect, and symbol 2 character effect. The symbol 1 storage number command indicates the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 storage number command indicates the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol. The communication inspection 1 command and the communication inspection 2 command are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The various commands of the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effect according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the various commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. It is a thing. The variable addition information command indicates information for adding an element (effect component) that suggests, for example, a jackpot expectation degree, to the effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is a thing. The symbol 1 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the second special symbol. is there.

As a command for confirming the symbol of the special symbol, there are a command for stopping the symbol 1 effect pattern and a command for stopping the symbol 2 effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the first special symbol and the effect symbol 190 based on the second special symbol, respectively.

The commands during which the symbol of the special symbol is being confirmed include the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened 0 (at low probability), the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened AZ (at low probability), the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened 0 (at high probability), and the probability is changing (at high probability). There is a command (up to the specified number of fluctuations). These are for transmitting commands related to the game state at that time, and are used for the effect mode display, the time reduction number display, and the like.

The commands at the time of the jackpot start demo include the symbol 1 jackpot start demo, the symbol 2 jackpot start demo, and the command for specifying the launch position. The symbol 1 jackpot start demo command and the symbol 2 jackpot start demo command are for displaying a start demo based on the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The launch position designation command is for notifying the player of the launch position when the player is made to strike the game ball by so-called left-handed or right-handed.

As commands when the big hit medium big winning opening is opened, there are commands for symbol 1 big hit medium demos 1 to 16 and symbol 2 big hit medium demos 1 to 16. These are for displaying the effect based on the jackpot symbol and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As a command when the big hit medium big prize opening is closed, there is a big winning opening closing production command. This is for displaying the big winning opening closing effect.

As commands at the time of the jackpot end demo, there are commands for the end per symbol and the end demo for 2 symbols. These are for displaying the winning end demo effect based on the winning symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The commands at the time of starting winning include commands for hit notice (hit notice effect), symbol notice (hit symbol notice effect), fluctuation notice (pattern notice effect), symbol 1 memory number, and symbol 2 memory number. The hit notice, symbol notice, and change notice commands are commands (look-ahead commands) related to the above-mentioned look-ahead effect by the advance information notification means 157. The winning notice command is for transmitting a random number range of winning / failing random numbers, and includes information on winning / failing according to the lottery probability. The symbol advance notice command is for transmitting a random number range of symbol random numbers, and includes information related to the type of hit. Further, the fluctuation warning command is for transmitting a random number range of the fluctuation pattern, and can be used to specify the type of the fluctuation pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.). The commands for the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2 are for transmitting the reserved number of stored numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, in this embodiment, as a result of the winning / failing lottery, information such as the presence / absence of the look-ahead effect and the period is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 by each command of the hit notice, the symbol notice, and the change notice.

The commands at the time of power failure recovery include communication inspection 1, communication inspection 2, game states A to E for power failure recovery, number of effects A to Z, effect selection states 0 to 2, symbol 1 character effect, and symbol 2 character effect. There are commands such as a power failure recovery hit state, a special symbol 1 state at the time of power failure recovery, a special symbol 2 state at the time of power failure recovery, firing position designation, errors a to d, a symbol 1 storage number, and a symbol 2 storage number.

The commands of communication inspection 1 and communication inspection 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is being performed. The commands of the game states A to E for recovering from the power failure are for transmitting different commands depending on the game state at the time of the power failure. The commands of the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effect according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. is there. The symbol 1-character effect and the symbol 2-character effect command are for transmitting commands corresponding to the symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power failure recovery hit state command is for transmitting different commands depending on whether or not the command is hit. The command of the special symbol 1 state when the power is restored and the special symbol 2 state when the power is restored sends a command according to the state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, such as waiting, changing, or hitting. Is for. As described above, the launch position designation command is for designating an appropriate launch position according to the situation. Errors a to d are for transmitting the presence / absence and type of an error. The commands for the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2 are for transmitting the reserved number of stored numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Main control processing of the main board>

Next, the main control processing on the main board 102 of the pachinko gaming machine 10 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19 and the like. Prior to the explanation, the terms "special electric accessory", "conditional device", and "continuous operation device for accessory" used below will be described. All of these represent conceptual devices in the control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and among these, the "special electric accessory" operates (opens) the large winning opening of the large winning opening device 90. It is a thing. In addition, the "condition device" operates when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" operates the special electric accessory continuously a plurality of times. Can be done.

The main control processes of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here are the power-on process (also referred to as “control start process” on the main board) shown in FIG. 14, the initial setting process shown in FIG. 15, and FIG. The setting change process shown in FIG. 17, the game progress interrupt process shown in FIG. 17, the (win / fail) lottery determination process shown in FIG. 18, and the power cutoff process shown in FIG.
<Processing when power is turned on>

The power-on processing schematically shown in FIG. 14 is a control process that is started after a security check using the manufacturing code of the CPU 501 is performed by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10. In this power-on processing, the initial setting processing (S101) is executed as shown in the figure. In the initial setting process (S101), processing related to the set value is executed, and the content of the initial setting process (S101) will be described later.

After the initial setting process (S101), the determination (S102) of whether or not the RWM clear button (RWM clear switch (544)) has been operated is executed. In this S102, if the RWM clear button is operated (S102: YES), the RWM clear process (S103) is executed, and the RWM clear information is transmitted to the sub side (sub-main board 301 side). Is done (S4). Further, the information indicating that the power is turned on normally (information on the power turned on normally) is saved in the RWM (S105), and the timer interrupt is enabled (S106). By permitting the timer interrupt (S106), the game progress interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) can be performed in a predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms). Further, various random numbers are updated every time the loop processing (circular processing) is repeated (S107).

Here, as the random numbers updated in the random number update process (S107), various initial value random numbers such as a normal symbol-per initial value random number, a special symbol-per-symbol initial value random number, and a special symbol-per-soft initial value random number are listed. Can be done. Further, when updating various random numbers, it is possible to use 2-byte soft random number update processing as a common control module. The random number updated in the random number update process (S107) is the software random number described above, and depending on the type of random number, the software random number updated in the random number update process (S107) and the hardware random number described above may be used. It is also possible to generate a random number value by the operation of.

If the RWM clear button has not been operated in S102 (S102: NO), it is determined whether or not the power off normal information is stored in the RWM (S111). Then, when the information on the normal power off is stored in the RWM (S111: YES), the RWM check is performed (S112), and it is determined whether or not the data in the RWM (data in a predetermined range) is normal. It is done (S113). In this S113, if the data in the RWM is not normal (S113: YES), the process proceeds to the RWM clear process (S103).

In the above S111, when the information on the normal power off is stored in the RWM (S111: NO), and when the data in the RWM is normal in the above S113 (S113: NO), the power is turned off from the RWM. The data of various information commands at the time is acquired (S116). Further, the acquired data of various information commands is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 side (S117), the solenoid recovery setting is performed (S118), and the above-mentioned S105 (process of saving the power-on normal information in the RWM). Move to.
<Initial setting process>

Next, the above-mentioned initial setting process (S101 in FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. In this initial setting process, the setting process of each port register is executed (S121), and it is determined whether or not the setting key has been inserted (S122). When the setting key is inserted (S22: YES), the setting value changing process (S126) is performed, and the setting value changing process (S126) will be described later.

In the above S122, if the setting key is not inserted (S122: NO), the setting value information is read (read) (S123), and it is determined whether or not the setting value is abnormal (S124). .. If the set value is not abnormal (S124: NO), the initial setting process is completed, but if the set value is abnormal (S124: YES), the set value abnormality is notified (S128). Then, the set value abnormality information is transmitted to the side of the sub-main board 301 (S129), and after that, a loop state is established.
<Setting value change process>

Next, the above-mentioned setting value change process (S126 in FIG. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. In this set value change process, the RWM of the set value storage area is checked (S131), and it is determined whether or not the set value information is abnormal (S132). If there is no abnormality in the set value information (S132: NO), it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch has been input (S133), and if the RWM clear switch has been input (S133: YES), the set value. The set value according to the information is displayed (S134).

If there is an abnormality in the set value information in S132 (S132: YES), the set value is forcibly set and the default value (here, "1") is set in the set value information (S141). Then, after the set value forced setting information is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 (S142), the set value is displayed (S133).

After the above S134, it is determined whether or not there is a change operation of the set value (S135), and if there is a change operation (S135: YES), the set value information at that time is incremented by +1 (S136). Further, it is determined whether or not the set value information has reached the set upper limit value (here, "6") (S137), and if the set value information has reached the upper limit value (S137: YES), the set value information at that time is set to ". 1 ”(S138). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting change is completed (whether or not the setting key is extracted) (S139), and if it is completed (S139: YES), the display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased in S140). Then, the setting value change process is terminated.

In the above S135, if there is no change setting (S135: NO), the process of adding the set value information (S136) to the process of setting the lower limit of the set value (here, "1") (S138) are not performed. , It shifts to the determination process (S139) whether or not the setting change is completed. If the set value information does not reach the upper limit value in S137 (S137: NO), whether or not the setting change is completed without performing the setting process (S138) of the set lower limit value in S137. To the determination process (S139). Further, if the setting change is not completed in S139 (S139: NO), the process returns to the setting value display process in S134.

In the above S133, when there is no input of the RWM clear switch (S133: NO), the set value corresponding to the set value information is displayed (S146) as in the above S134. Further, similarly to the above S139, it is determined whether or not the setting change is completed (whether or not the setting key is extracted) (S147), and if it is completed (S147: YES), the process proceeds to the above S139. The display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased in S140), and the set value change process is terminated. If the setting change is not completed in S147 (S147: NO), the process returns to the process of displaying the setting value in S136.

That is, in the above S133, when the RWM clear switch is input (S133: YES), the set value is displayed (S134), and the process for changing the set value (the above S135 to S138, etc.) is performed. It will be possible. However, in the above S133, when the RWM clear switch is not input (S133: NO), the set value is displayed (S146), but the process for changing the set value as in the above S135 to S138 is performed. The setting value is displayed in a state where it is not possible (this state may be called a setting display mode).
<Game progress interrupt processing>

Next, the game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17) that is repeated for each timer interrupt of a predetermined cycle will be described. Although this game progress interrupt processing (also referred to as “timer interrupt processing”) has been omitted in the above description, it has a predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms cycle) based on the cycle information set in the power-on processing (FIG. 14). It is repeated. As shown in FIG. 17, in the game progress interrupt processing, interrupt operation condition setting (S41, S42), recursion of interrupt processing time monitoring means (S43), game machine management (S45 to S70), interrupt permission (S45 to S70) S71) is performed in order to return to the processing before the game progress interrupt occurs.

Specifically, in the interrupt operation condition setting process (S41, S42), the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41) in order to clear the interrupt flag, and the interrupt operation condition setting. The value is set in the control register corresponding to the predetermined input terminal (S42). After that, the second recursive information is set (S43), and the second recursive information is further set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). As will be described later, the second recursive information is a condition for recurring and restarting the monitoring timekeeping of the interrupt processing time monitoring means together with the first recursive information set in advance.

In the management of the gaming machines (S45 to S70), in order to manage the gaming machines, the following processes are executed in order. First, an input process (S45) is executed in order to monitor the input of a specific signal. Here, the objects to be monitored are various switches mounted on the game board surface, a saucer full switch, an open signal, a magnetic detection signal, a radio wave detection signal, a glass undetected signal, and a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal. Is.

Subsequently, various random number update processes (S46) are executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Further, the initial value update type random number update process (S47) is executed to update the normal symbol per random number, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the special symbol per soft random number. Next, the initial value random number update process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. Further, in order to update the 2-byte timer, the timer subtraction process (S49) is executed, and in order to set the validity period of the second start winning opening 63, the validity period setting process (S50) of the second start opening is executed. ..

Further, the prize monitoring process (S51) is executed, the number of times the prize balls are paid out is stored, the output request of the external information for the board is created, and the transmission request of the command to be transmitted to the sub board 104 is performed. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, the prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

Next, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operating gate (operating port 68), the normal symbol operating gate monitoring process (S53) is executed in order to store the random numbers related to the normal symbol, and the normal symbol display device or the normal symbol is executed. The normal symbol control process (S54) is executed in order to perform the process related to the electric accessory. Further, in order to monitor the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S55) is executed. Further, in order to monitor the winning of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 of the game ball, the starting opening monitoring control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol is executed. In order to perform the process related to the display unit 71, the special symbol control process (S57) is executed. Subsequently, the special electric accessory control process (S58) is executed to perform the process related to the special electric accessory, and the process related to the valid period of the large winning opening is performed, so that the large winning opening valid period setting process (S59) is performed. Is executed, and the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S60) is executed in order to monitor the fluctuation start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, anomaly detection processing (S61) is executed to monitor magnetism, disconnection / short circuit / power supply, radio wave monitoring, glass frame set / game board frame open / closed state, and pair glass monitoring. Then, in order to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process (S62) is executed. Further, in order to request display of the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol display device, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol display device, the game state display process (S63). ) Is executed, and the handle state signal inspection process (S64) is executed in order to monitor the touch state (including the state of the operation amount) of the firing handle 20. In addition, a special symbol display, a normal symbol display, an operation holding ball number display of the special symbol display device (70, 71), an operation hold ball number display of the normal symbol display device, a game state display, a special electric accessory The LED output process (S65) is executed in order to display the number of times that the is continuously operated and the error is displayed.

Subsequently, in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, the launch control signal output process (S66) is executed, and in order to create and output a signal to be output to the test device, the test signal output process (S67) is performed. To execute. Further, in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid and the large winning opening (open) solenoid, the solenoid output process (S68) is executed, and the effect control command is transmitted, so that the effect control command transmission process ( S69) is executed, and the external information output process (S70) is executed in order to output signals to the external terminals (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

After that, the interrupt enable (S71) is executed, and the control process exits to the return (RET). Then, using the remaining time until the next game interrupt is executed, the above-mentioned circular processing (repeated circular processing including the random number update processing of S7) of the power-on processing (FIG. 14) is executed. ..
<< Handle status signal inspection processing >>

In the above-mentioned handle state signal inspection process (S64), in order to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20, the handle state is inspected, and when it is determined as a result of the inspection that the handle state has changed, the handle state monitoring timer Is subtracted, the handle state is updated, the handle state monitoring timer is set, and a command transmission request for the handle state effect is performed. If it is determined as a result of the inspection that there is no change in the handle status, the handle status monitoring timer is set. When it is determined that the handle timer is being subtracted in the subtraction of the handle status monitoring timer, the subsequent processing related to the handle status is not performed.
<Lottery judgment processing>

Next, the above-mentioned lottery determination process (also referred to as “lottery determination process”) will be described. This lottery determination process is a process of determining whether or not a player has won (a process of performing a big hit lottery determination) using probability data. Further, the lottery determination process can be performed by, for example, the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S60) in the game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17) described above.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a lottery determination process relating to success or failure. In this lottery determination process, first, when the process proceeds to step S1022, the main CPU 501 sets 1 in a predetermined register (for example, C register) as the winning number data, and proceeds to the next step S1024. When the process proceeds to step S1024, the main CPU 501 sets 2 as the repetition count data and proceeds to the next step S1025. In the winning number data, "1" indicates a big hit and "2" indicates a small hit.

Proceeding to step S1025, the main CPU 501 acquires probability data from the lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 501 specifies the address of the probability data according to the game state (probability fluctuation state or normal probability state) and the set value, and acquires the probability data corresponding to the specified address from the lottery table. And store it in the register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1026.

Proceeding to step S1026, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the result is correct. Here, the main CPU 501 first stores the random number value acquired when winning the starting port in the comparison register (for example, DE register) for lottery for the winning / failing determination, and then acquires it in step S1025. The value stored in the calculated probability data is subtracted from the value of the comparison register to obtain the value of the new comparison register. In this way, the value of the comparison register is updated.

In the next step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the user has won. Here, by subtracting the probability data from the value of the comparison register (for example, the DE register), when the value of the DE register becomes smaller than "0" (when a carry occurs), "1" is set in the carry flag of the flag register. It is set. That is, the carry flag is set. Further, "carry occurs" means that "1" is set in the carry flag. Then, in step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the carry flag has been won by determining whether or not the carry flag is set to "1".

Here, when the carry flag is not set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that the item has not been won (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028. On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that the carry flag has been won (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the process according to this flowchart. Here, the winning number data set at the time of "Yes" in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined by the lottery determination (for example, if the winning number is 1, the winning number is a big hit, if the winning number is 2, the winning number is a small hit). It will be.

In the next step S1028, the main CPU 501 updates the winning number data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 adds "1" to the value of the winning number data (for example, C register) to obtain a new winning number data (for example, C register) value. That is, the value of the winning number data (for example, C register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1029.

Proceeding to step S1029, the main CPU 501 updates the repetition count data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 subtracts "1" from the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) to obtain a new repetition count data (for example, B register) value. That is, the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1030.

Proceeding to step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is "0". Here, when the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) is "0", it indicates that the repetition count has ended, and the repetition count data (for example, B register) is not "0" ("0"). When (greater than), it indicates that the number of repetitions has not ended. Then, in step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether the value of the number of repetitions data (for example, the B register) is "0".

Here, when the value of the B register is "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033. On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

Further, when "No" is set in step S1030, the hit / fail determination in step S1026 is performed again using the same probability data as the previous time. In the next step S1033, the main CPU 501 sets the value of the winning number data (for example, the C register) to "00 (H)" which is the non-winning data, and ends the process according to this flowchart.

With the above configuration, as described in step S1028, since the process of updating the winning number data is included in the lottery determination process, it is not necessary to store the winning number data in the lottery table. Further, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, it is not necessary to repeatedly set the same probability data in the lottery table, so that the amount of ROM used by the lottery table can be reduced.

In this example, one winning number is provided for each small hit and one for the big hit, and the type of the big hit or the small hit is determined by the symbol random number acquired separately at the time of the hit. However, these types are determined by this processing. Is also possible. In that case, if the value of the repetition count data in step S1024 is changed according to the number of types and the probability data for each winning number (range value corresponding to each winning number) is set, the same determination routine can be used. It is also possible.
<Power off processing>

Next, the power off processing executed when the power is cut off will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the power off processing, the data of all used registers is saved in the RWM (S81), and the interrupt enable / disable state before the power off is saved (S82). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-on normal information is saved in the RWM (S83), and if it is not saved (S83: NO), the power-off abnormality information is saved in the RWM (S84). The process proceeds to the RWM access prohibition process (S88). On the other hand, if it is saved (S83: YES), the stack pointer value is saved in the stack pointer buffer (S85), the power off / normal information is saved in the RWM (S86), and the RWM checksum is calculated. Then, the checksum data is saved (S87). Then, the RWM is prohibited from accessing (S88), and the reset of the CPU 501 is waited while looping the control process.

Further, in this power off processing, even if both the first recursive information and the second recursive information described above have not been set, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursive means, and the first recursive information and the second recursive information are performed. Information is set, the monitoring timekeeping of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the timekeeping is recursive. Further, the compulsory setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed in the present embodiment at a timing immediately after the start of the power interruption process and before the process of saving all used registers (S81). It has been evacuated. Then, when the power supply is restarted, the control process is started in a state where the monitoring timekeeping is recursive. In other words, by forcibly recurring the monitoring timekeeping when a power failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the control processing from proceeding without the monitoring timekeeping recurring in the control process immediately after the power supply is restarted. It has become.
<Other individual control processing modes>
<< Control mode related to command transmission timing >>

In this embodiment, the effect control command output from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is temporarily stored in the command buffer by a command request before transmission. The command buffer has a plurality of buffers functioning as ring buffers, and is used once in the order of accumulation in the command buffer in the control process for command transmission (here, the effect control command transmission process (S69)). In the game progress interrupt process, one command (a pair of data of MODE and EVENT) is taken out from the command buffer and transmitted. It is also possible to adopt a method in which the command with the highest priority is sent first. Further, in various control processes, when a command that needs to be transmitted occurs, it is possible to transmit the command at any time. When such a method is adopted, the effect command is intensively transmitted in one control processing module such as the effect control command transmission process (S69) during one game progress interrupt process. Instead, each time a command transmission is required, the command transmission is sequentially performed in each control processing module. Therefore, it is unlikely that the command transmission will be carried over to the game progress interrupt processing from the next time onward. Then, for example, there is no delay in command transmission at the time of starting winning or at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and quick command processing becomes possible.
<< Control mode related to update of hold memory >>

In this embodiment, as described above, the configuration in which the second game is prioritized is adopted, and the execution order of the first and second plurality of games is regular, so that the hold memory is updated. Is performed in order for each second game or the first game. Therefore, if only the hold-stored information is updated for each of the second game or the first game, the hold-stored information update is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, instead of giving priority to the first game or giving priority to any of the games, the hold memory is digested in the order in which the start winning is generated and held and stored (winning order digestion). It is also possible to adopt a configuration that is used. Of these, when a configuration is adopted in which the reserved memory is digested in the order in which the starting prizes are generated, the reserved memory information is updated according to the digestion, the total number of reserved games of a plurality of games is updated, and the winning order is stored. As a result, the information stored on hold can be updated as a whole.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to notify the sub-main board 301 that the hold storage has been updated, the symbol storage number command (symbol 1 storage number command or symbol 2 storage number command) is requested as described above. By including both the symbol 1 storage number command and the symbol 2 storage number command in one command, the required program and memory capacity can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to lottery of fluctuation pattern >>

Subsequently, various aspects related to the lottery of the variable pattern will be described. One of the modes of determining the variation pattern described here may be selected and applied in one pachinko gaming machine 10, or may be used in combination as appropriate. When a plurality of modes are used in combination, it is possible to use the modes properly based on factors such as the result of success or failure.

In this embodiment, as described above, the winning / failing result, the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (which may be a symbol group), and the variation pattern selection state (status information of the special symbol) are determined for determining the variation pattern. Although it is used as an element, a variation pattern table corresponding to the combination of these determinants is selected. Then, along with the determination of the variation pattern table, the variation time associated with the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern random number. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the determination of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern table is different depending on whether the result of the winning / losing lottery is a big hit or a miss. That is, in the case of a big hit, a variable pattern table is selected from among those associated with the status information of the special symbol such as the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (group), and the random number of success or failure. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a variation pattern table is selected from among those associated with the game state, the special symbol, the number of reserved balls, and the winning / failing random number. Of these, regarding the fluctuation pattern in which the re-lottery time is given for the production in the case of a big hit, the re-lottery time is given based on the production state (presence or absence of a specific production, etc.) and the special symbol group. The presence or absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301.

Further, when determining the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time, it is possible to determine the fluctuation addition information according to the determined fluctuation pattern number, and to determine the subsequent fluctuation time based on the fluctuation addition information. For example, when the selected fluctuation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern production, it is conceivable that the extension of the fluctuation time corresponding to the variation pattern is determined ex post facto.

Further, as described above, by setting the command of the variation additional information as the command at the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol, the variation determined in advance in relation to the elements such as the game state and the winning symbol on the sub-main board 301. It is possible to perform an effect of adding the additional time to the time later. Then, in the case of determining the fluctuation time of the overall effect symbol in such an embodiment, it is possible to create various fluctuation patterns while suppressing the number of fluctuation patterns provided in advance as follows. Is. That is, considering the case of performing the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous notice (so-called "pseudo-ream"), when the fluctuation patterns of the pseudo-ream are simply set individually, the same number of fluctuation patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. Need to keep. When the effect patterns such as the effect symbols on the sub-main board 301 are prepared for the variation patterns that are all individually determined on the main board 102 in this way, the total number of variation patterns on the main board 102 is large. Therefore, for example, it is possible to reach a number exceeding 256. Therefore, in order to give an identifiable code to a large number of fluctuation patterns, it is necessary to increase the number of bits and the number of bytes for expressing the code as compared with the conventional case.

However, by using the fluctuation addition information (variation addition pattern), it is possible to form a fluctuation pattern ex post facto by connecting, for example, random number lottery fluctuation addition information to a relatively small number of basic fluctuation patterns. Is. As a result, a new fluctuation pattern can be formed by combining the fluctuation patterns, so that various fluctuation patterns can be created without increasing the number of fluctuation patterns provided in advance. It should be noted that the random number value related to the variable addition information can also be transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 when the start winning prize is generated as a command for the look-ahead effect. It is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variable addition pattern so that the variable addition information can be easily added when the limited frequency pattern effect is executed. To further give an example of using the variable additional information, when the probability variation symbol "777" is displayed from the beginning as the combination of the effect symbols 190, the variable additional information is not set and the combination of the effect symbols 190 is used. Once the non-probability variation symbol "666" is displayed, the effect until the result of whether or not to promote to "777" is displayed (for example, the effect of shaking fluctuation and the development of the variation mode). (Representation, etc.) may be performed by setting variable additional information.

Further, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined with the number of reserved balls as an element, and the reference fluctuation pattern table differs depending on the number of reserved balls. The fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4. The reason why the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the hold 4 is provided in addition to the four hold 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started from a situation where the number of reserved balls is four and the number of reserved balls becomes three. A state in which the number of reserved balls is 3 at a stage in which the control process during the game progress interrupt process being executed at that time does not reach the determination of the fluctuation pattern, which is the process during the later game progress interrupt process. When a new start prize is generated from, the number of reserved balls is added to 4 when the fluctuation pattern is determined. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can also be a factor for determining the fluctuation pattern.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 3. In this case, in terms of control processing, it is possible to configure the configuration in which the starting prizes from the state of the number of reserved balls 3 to the determination of the fluctuation pattern are not added. It should be noted that any aspect can be applied to a pachinko gaming machine of a type in which a maximum number of pachinko machines (for example, 8) other than 4 is set.

Further, the acquisition timing of the variable pattern random number can be set to the time of the variable pattern lottery. That is, since the fluctuation pattern random number is not a random number related to the operation of a special electric accessory or the like, as an element for performing an appropriate game, for example, in aiming for a fair game as compared with a random number of success or failure. The need for constraints is reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable that the variable pattern random number is not intentionally acquired at the time of starting winning, and for example, the variable pattern random number is acquired and stored at the time of the variable pattern lottery as a separately provided timing. By doing so, the number of information to be stored at the time of winning the start can be reduced, and the capacity of the program and the memory can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to symbol designation >>

In the symbol lottery, the symbol determination table to be used is determined based on the value of the upper byte of the code indicating the symbol random number, and then the symbol is determined from the determined symbol determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number. Is also possible. In this embodiment, since the numerical range of the symbol random number is set to "0 to 999", the binary code code of these numerical values can be used. By doing so, the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. In addition, the game status such as the number of rounds and the number of time reductions is distributed to the winning symbols (which may be a symbol group), and the number of subsequent rounds, the number of time reductions, and the opening time of the large winning opening are determined according to the winning symbols. And the opening pattern may be determined. By doing so, it is not necessary to store or control the data unique to the game state, and the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. Further, information for transmitting the game state (game state designation information) to a command for transmitting a symbol or the like from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 (for example, each command of the symbol 1 effect pattern and the symbol 2 effect pattern in this embodiment). ) Can be added. This command is not transmitted to the sub-main board 301 immediately after being created, but is created, temporarily stored, and then transmitted to the sub-main board 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
<< Relationship between special symbol and production symbol variation time >>

As described above, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) and the corresponding effect symbol 190 are controlled to start and stop fluctuations in synchronization with each other. Depending on the case, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol 190 may be shortened to some extent with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

That is, when the variation of the special symbol or the variation pattern is determined and the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect symbol variation start command (command at the start of variation) is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. However, the time required to send and receive a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the start of fluctuation) or the command buffer (the ring buffer type is used in this embodiment) is set and waits. It is conceivable that the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol will be delayed from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol due to the influence of the time until all the commands (first-in commands) are sent. Further, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation stop command (command at the time of confirming the symbol of the special symbol) is transmitted to the sub-main board 301, but a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the start of fluctuation at the time of determining the symbol) is transmitted. ) Is required to be transmitted and received, and the degree of congestion of the command buffer (the degree of the number of commands waiting to be transmitted) may delay the stoppage of fluctuation of the effect symbol.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol is set to some extent with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol based on the command transmitted at the start of the fluctuation, and by performing the fluctuation fluctuation, the special symbol starts the next fluctuation. I try to avoid the situation where the last symbol is stopped and displayed later. Due to the processing delay due to the number of commands, the display during fluctuation may straddle the next fluctuation, but at the end of the fluctuation, fewer commands are sent to the sub-main board 301 than at the start of the fluctuation, so the amount of delay Is suppressed, and the effect symbol can be almost certainly fixed during the fixed display time of the special symbol.
<< Preliminary judgment of winning / failing lottery result >>

First, in this embodiment, as described above (FIGS. 9A and 12), the winning / failing random number range in the first lottery and the second lottery is "0 to 65535", and the winning / failing random number range " 0 to 65535 ”is divided into a plurality of random value range (here, A to N) as shown in FIG. 13 (a).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), among the "0 to 65535", "0 to 205" belongs to the classification of the look-ahead code A, and "206" is the classification of the look-ahead code B. Belongs to. Further, the winning / failing random number values "207" to "210" belong to the classification of the look-ahead codes C to F, respectively. Further, the winning / failing random number values "121-615" belong to the classification of the look-ahead code G, and the winning / failing random number values "616 to 618" belong to the classification of the look-ahead code H.

Subsequently, the winning / failing random number values "619 to 621", "622-624", "625-627", and "628 to 630" belong to the classification of the look-ahead codes H to L, respectively. Further, the winning / failing random number values "64874 to 65534" belong to the classification of the look-ahead code M. Further, in this embodiment, the winning / failing random numbers "631 to 64873" and "65534" belong to the classification of the look-ahead code M.

FIG. 13B shows the contents of each look-ahead code. As shown in the figure, the look-ahead code A means that all settings are hits (big hits) regardless of the set values. Subsequently, the look-ahead code B means that when the set value is "2" or more, it is a hit regardless of whether it is a normal time or a probability change time. That is, if the read-ahead code B is set value "2" or more, it will show a hit in both normal probability and high probability, but if the set value is "1", it will show a loss. Further, the look-ahead codes C to F mean that if the set value is "3" or more to "6", it will be a hit in both the normal time and the high probability time regardless of the probability state.

Subsequently, the look-ahead code G means that the read-ahead code G will be a hit regardless of the set value as long as the probability is changing. That is, the look-ahead code G shows a hit when the probability is high, but shows a loss when the probability is normal. Further, the look-ahead code H means that if the probability change is in progress, a hit is made with a set value of "2" or more. Further, the look-ahead codes I to L mean that if the probability is changing, the set value is "3" or more to "6" and the hit is made. Further, the look-ahead code M means that the hit is a small hit, and the look-ahead code N means that the look-ahead code N is out of order regardless of the set value or the probability state.

Using the pre-reading code grouped in this way, for example, the main board 102 determines the pre-reading code to which the acquired random number value belongs, and the information (command) corresponding to the determined pre-reading code is used as the above-mentioned advance notification information. It is possible to transmit to the sub-main board 301. Then, on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to perform a hit advance notice effect as a look-ahead effect in relation to the hit / fail determination result without waiting for the hold to be digested.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-judgment of the type of the special symbol and the pre-judgment of the type of the variation pattern related to the special symbol are also based on the random number range as in the case of the result of the winning / failing lottery described above. It is supposed to be done. The types of special symbols and the types of fluctuation patterns related to the special symbols are provided in large numbers compared to the types of results of the winning / failing lottery, and the number of look-ahead codes (number of groups) is also larger than in the case of the winning / failing lottery. It has become. However, as a method of pre-judgment based on the random value range, although the random value range and the types of lottery results to be grouped are different, it is possible to perform the same as the pre-judgment related to the above-mentioned hit / fail judgment. .. Therefore, here, detailed description of the preliminary determination based on the random value range for the symbol advance notice effect and the pattern advance notice effect will be omitted.

By performing the preliminary determination based on such a random value range, it is possible to round the information, and it is possible to create a command related to the preliminary determination with a small amount of information. That is, when the number of random numbers exceeds 256, the number of bytes required to represent the random values exceeds 1 byte. Therefore, assuming that the random number value information is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 as it is (as raw information) for the preliminary determination, the information for identifying which random number is transmitted is transmitted by MODE and the random number is transmitted. In some cases, a 2-byte command (MODE, EVENT) must be transmitted in two steps to notify the random number value in order to store and transmit in EVENT.

However, as in this embodiment, by converting the acquired random value into information indicating the range to which the acquired random value belongs and transmitting the information to the sub-main board 301, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced to be smaller than the number of random value values, and the information is disturbed. Even when the number of numerical values exceeds 256 (1 byte), it is possible to command the attribute of the acquired random value value with the amount of information of 1 byte. In addition, on the side of the main board 102, in case a situation occurs in which the pre-reading information is not desired to be transmitted as described later, a code indicating that fact (for example, indefinite or undetermined) is provided. , It is also possible to send a command indicating the code to the sub-main board 301 side.

Here, as the above-mentioned "situation in which the look-ahead information is not desired to be transmitted", for example, when the priority digestion side (example: special figure 2 side) is held during normal game in the priority digestion type 1 + 1 type gaming machine. Can be exemplified. Then, in the "priority digestion type" in the above description, for example, as described above, one of the second game and the first game (here, the second game) is prioritized over the other (here, the first game). Means something like. Further, the "1 + 1 type gaming machine" in the above description means a gaming machine having a game property in which a plurality of games (here, two) corresponding to the conventional first-class pachinko gaming machine are mixed as described above. There is.

In addition, as another "situation in which you do not want to send look-ahead information", the non-priority digestion side (for example, the special figure 1 side) during a specific game (during high base) in the same priority digestion type 1 + 1 type gaming machine is suspended. The case where it occurs can be mentioned. Further, when the priority digestion side (for example, the special figure 2 side) is held during the normal game in the priority digestion type 1 + 1 type gaming machine as described above, the look-ahead effect related to the hold on the special figure 1 side is executed. If it is inside, the look-ahead effect may be canceled (example: the reserved image in Special Figure 1 changed to red, then returned to blue), and conversely, the same gaming machine. If a non-priority digestion side (eg, special figure 1 side) is held during a specific game (during high base) in, even if the look-ahead effect related to the hold on the special figure 2 side is being executed, the look-ahead is performed. It is also possible not to stop the production (example: the reserved image of Special Figure 2 is kept as it is). Regarding the touch effect described later, even if the effect related to the look-ahead effect is scheduled to be changed, it is set so that the touch effect is not executed when the look-ahead effect is stopped. Become.
<Various utilization measures for touch detection>

Next, a measure for utilizing touch detection related to the operation of the firing handle 20, which can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. Here, "touch detection" largely means that the touch switch 310 (FIG. 4) described above detects human contact. Then, this "touch detection" is one aspect related to the operation detection of the firing handle (20).

In the present invention, with respect to the relationship between touch detection and effect output, various control elements (control content determining elements) are examined as will be described later, and an appropriate control element is adopted from the examined elements to adopt the pachinko gaming machine 10. It is supposed to be applied to. Then, such various control elements are appropriately applied to the pachinko gaming machine 10, and the effect is executed based on the detection of the state of the gaming machine and the steering wheel operation so that the operation detection of the firing handle can be effectively utilized. Is assumed.

More specifically, in the present invention, the state of the pachinko gaming machine is changed from before and after the power is turned on to the standby state, and the game is performed, and the special symbol is changed and stopped according to the result of the winning / losing lottery (special). A big hit is made through the variable display and stop display (design game related to the production symbol) of the design (design game related to the design) and the production design (including the reduced display), and the game machine is used until the big hit game is completed. It is regarded as a series of such states. Further, in various states, the presence / absence of touch detection related to the firing handle 20 is assumed, and each state and situation is further subdivided, and the presence / absence of the effect output and its contents are examined.

Then, depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states the game state is, whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection is different. It is configured to get. Then, as will be described later, the effect execution condition is determined so that whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection can be different, and the effect execution condition is set to this effect execution condition. Is the game state of a plurality of types of game states, at which timing the touch detection was performed, and before the touch detection timing, the effect operation unit (operation button 22 that can be operated by the player, operation lever). , Whether or not the player operation input means such as the cross key 96) has been operated, and the like are included.

Then, the ones in which various examination items are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 are regarded as the respective embodiments. Further, in the following examination, the effect performed based on touch detection (triggered by touch detection) is referred to as "touch effect", but the term "touch effect" is related to touch detection in terms of control. It means something that is said to be, and it is a concept that includes things that are easy for those who see the production to understand that it is a touch production, and things that are difficult to understand. Further, the "touch effect" may be performed as an effect (launch detection effect) executed in a situation where a change in the firing intensity volume is detected in addition to the touch detection.

Further, as for the control elements and assumptions examined here, it is possible to coexist those that can coexist in the pachinko gaming machine 10 in terms of control, and to appropriately select and adopt those that cannot coexist. In this way, touch detection is performed by examining the production output and control processing related to the combination of various states of the gaming machine and the presence / absence of touch detection as a starting point, and appropriately selecting and adopting the pachinko gaming machine. It becomes possible to perform the effect output by using the handle operations including the above in the maximum variety, and it becomes possible to utilize the handle operations more effectively.

In examining the utilization measures of touch detection in this way, as shown in FIG. 22, elements can be considered in order to determine the relationship between touch detection and effect output at the design stage. At the left end (front side) of the charts in FIGS. 22 and 23, there are "structure", "gaming state of gaming machine", and "touch detection" as classification of control elements (classification of examination items) related to the relationship between touch detection and effect output. "Effects executed based on", "Other processes executed based on touch detection", "Effect permission / regulation conditions", and "Other 1" are listed. Here, the "gaming state of the gaming machine" can also be referred to as, for example, "a gaming state that can occur in the gaming machine", "a state that can occur in the gaming machine", and the like.
<Structure>

Of these, the classification item of "structure" shown at the top of FIG. 22 is a classification based on the equipment configuration for touch detection and the equipment configuration that can be related to touch detection in terms of control. Then, as the classification of "structure", it is possible to appropriately select and subdivide what is necessary for the possible application measures, but here, as shown in the figure, "touch detection" and "effect button". "Items will be listed. In addition, in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, alphabets and symbols by a combination of alphabets and numbers are attached to each item. Then, in the example of FIG. 22, the symbol "A" is attached to the "structure" at the top of the table, and the "touch detection" and the "effect button" shown below are of "A1" and "A2", respectively. It has a symbol.

Of these, the "touch detection" of the symbol "A1" means a configuration required to detect the contact of a player or the like. Then, the item of "A1: touch detection" may include the configuration of the touch switch 310 and the like described above. Further, the item of "A2: effect button" may include the configuration of the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 described above.
<Game state of the gaming machine>

Subsequently, as the items of the "gaming state of the gaming machine" in the next stage described above, "B: normal state" and "C: special state" can be roughly mentioned. Then, these "B: normal state" and "C: special state" are both "B: of the gaming machine" in the "state before touch change" which means the state before touch detection is performed. It means "normal state" and "C: special state".
<< B: Normal state (state before touch change) >>

Further, "B: normal state" can be divided into "B1: game standby state" and "B2: game in progress state". Of these, "B1: game standby state" means a state in which a special symbol, which is the main game of the pachinko machine in the present embodiment, is changed, and a game such as a special game performed according to the result is not performed. doing. In other words, even when the above-mentioned fluctuation of the normal symbol or the opening operation of the electric chew based on the winning of the normal symbol is performed, it is defined as the "game standby state" for convenience. Further, the "B1: game waiting state" includes a state in which a customer waiting demo is displayed after a predetermined time has passed without touch detection. However, the "customer waiting demo" is described as described above. It can be called a "standby demo" or the like. Further, as the "customer waiting demo", it is conceivable to provide a basic "normal demo" and a special "non-normal demo" as compared with this "normal demo".

Further, as shown in the figure, "B1: game standby state" is "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)", "B12: game standby B (design stopped)", "B13: game standby C". It can be divided into the items of "(setting screen for production / sound, etc.)" and "B14: game standby (power saving)". Of these, "B11: Game standby A (normal demo display)" means a basic standby state among the game standby states, and the above-mentioned "normal demo" display is performed.

It is also possible to handle the game standby state in which the above-mentioned fluctuation of the normal symbol is executed separately from other game standby states. In that case, "B11: Game standby A (normal demo display)" in this embodiment. ) ”To“ B14: Game standby (power saving) ”is further subdivided into a standby state (for example, B111: Normal symbol and electric chew are not activated in the game standby A state, B112: Normal symbol changes in the game standby A state. Medium, B113: The electric chew is operating in the game standby A state ...) may be defined.

FIG. 33A shows an example of the effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of “B11: Game standby A (normal demo display)”. In FIG. 33 (a), the company name of the gaming machine manufacturer / distributor (SAMMY) is displayed in most areas of the screen, and the message flow display (scroll display) in the lower message display area 364 that appears at the bottom of the screen. Is being done. As the message display, an example such as "touch the steering wheel to move to the variable standby screen and turn on the effect button to move to the customized screen ()" can be exemplified. In the following, the standby screen display in the state of "B11: Game standby A (normal demo display)" may be referred to as "standby screen A". This "standby screen A" is when the data in the RWM is not normal (S113: YES) in S113 when the power is restored (when the power is turned on in FIG. 14), and the process shifts to the RWM clear process (S103). Is also displayed. In addition, as the game standby screen at this time, the character display such as "initialized" may be written together instead of the character display of "energized" in FIG. 35 (a). A dedicated standby screen corresponding to the above may be provided.

Then, when touch detection occurs in the situation as in the example of FIG. 33 (a), for example, the touch effect as shown in FIG. 34 (a) is performed, and the effect change (touch change) based on the touch detection is performed. It is possible to cause it. In the example of FIG. 34 (a), no change appears in the image display on the effect display device 60, but as shown by adding the speaker mark 376 and the lamp mark 377 on the right side of the figure, the sound output and the light Output is being done.

Here, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp mark 377 shown in the drawing do not indicate that these marks 376 and 377 are displayed on the effect display device 60, and are different from the image display performed by the effect display device 60. Separately, it is for schematically showing that audio output from the speaker (21) and light output (lamp output) by a predetermined LED are performed. The speaker mark 376 shown in the upper part of the figure indicates that there is audio output by the design image of the appearance of notes coming out from the speaker, and the lamp mark 377 shown in the middle part of the figure indicates that the light bulb is lit. It shows that the light output is performed by the design image of the state of being.

Further, the lamp mark 377 shown in parentheses in the lower part of the figure indicates a display mode when the lamp is not output. The lower lamp mark 377 (with parentheses) can be used in place of the middle lamp mark 377 (without parentheses) when the light output (lamp effect) as a touch effect is not performed. As for the speaker mark 366, a mark when no output may be used may be used. As the speaker mark when there is no sound output, for example, it is possible to use a design image of a speaker to which no musical note is added.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), it is also possible to indicate in the figure that the reach effect is being executed by the lamp mark 378. In this case, the characters "reach effect" and "touch notification LED" are shown in the figure, one lamp mark 378 indicates the presence or absence of reach effect, and the other lamp mark 377 indicates the presence or absence of touch effect. It can be shown so that it can be distinguished.

Further, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp mark 377, 378 described here can be used to explain the combination of effects even in various gaming states described below, depending on the presence or absence of audio output or light output. It is a thing. In the following description, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp mark 377 and 378 are not added to the figures of all screen display examples to indicate the presence or absence of sound output and optical output, but if necessary, The speaker mark 376 and the lamp marks 377 and 378 are added to indicate the combination of productions (combination of productions).

Subsequently, in the above-mentioned "B12: game standby B (design stopped)", the display related to the special symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) and the effect is stopped (here, the fixed stop state), and the next change. Is not performed (there is no hold in either special figure 1 or special figure 2), or when a predetermined condition is satisfied (details will be described later, but for example, a predetermined state is determined from the display of the standby screen A). It means a standby state (after a lapse of time, etc.). Then, when the "B12: game standby B (design stopped)" elapses for a predetermined period, it is possible to control the mode such as shifting to the above-mentioned "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)". ..

FIG. 33B shows an example of the effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of “B12: game standby B (design stopped)”. In the example of FIG. 33 (b), the numerical symbols of "3", "3", and "1" are displayed as the above-mentioned symbol element effect symbols, and the heart symbol is each numerical symbol as the above-mentioned non-symbol element effect symbol. In combination with, the effect symbols 190a to 190c are configured. In the following, the standby screen display in the state of "B12: game standby B (design stopped)" may be referred to as "standby screen B".

In this "standby screen B", the decorative design (directing design) may have a design (here, a heart) displayed, but a number (here, 1 or 3) may be hidden. Further, the number may be displayed when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied (= the start opening is won from the standby screen B).

Further, in the lower right of the display area 194, the display corresponding to the display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c can be reduced and simplified so as not to be conspicuous, and can be performed together with the display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c. The reduced effect symbol display area 361 has appeared. Further, in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197, the hold display of the star design is performed. Then, when touch is detected in the situation as in the example of FIG. 33 (b), for example, the touch effect area 362 in which the character "Welcome" shown in FIG. 34 (b) is displayed may appear. It is possible. Then, the touch detection can be used as an opportunity to change the effect output.

Display priorities are provided in the above-mentioned effect symbols 190a to 190c (decorative symbols), the reduced effect symbol display area 361, and the reserved number display unit (196, 197). Here, the order of priority of display is, in descending order, the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the reserved number display unit (196, 197), and the effect symbols 190a to 190c. However, the priority of this display may be different depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine. For example, in the case of changing (during the game), the display priority is higher in the order of the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the reserved number display unit (196, 197), and the effect symbols 190a to 190c, but the change is waiting. In some cases, the display may be configured so that the display priority is higher in the order of the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the effect symbols 190a to 190c, and the hold number display unit (196, 197). When performing a touch effect that causes the touch effect area 362 to appear during the symbol variation, at least one of the effect symbols 190a to 190c and the reduced effect symbol display area 361 has a higher display priority than the touch effect. Is also set to be high.

Further, on the standby screen B, of the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197, the second hold number display unit 197 may not be displayed, and only the first hold number display unit 196 may be displayed. It is possible. In this case, it is also possible to move the first hold number display unit 196 to, for example, the left and right center portions at the lower part of the screen. However, in this case, the standby screen B can be transitioned only in the normal probability (low probability) state, and the start winning prize is detected for a predetermined time in the specific game state such as during the probability change or the electric support. It is desirable that it does not migrate even if it is not present.

The standby screen B, which is the "variable standby screen", is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 33 (b), and various modes can be adopted. In addition, various touch effects can be adopted. For example, it is possible to display something like the lower message display area 364 illustrated in the standby screen A of FIG. 33 (a).

Further, as another example related to the touch effect of the standby screen B, for example, an effect (RTC-related effect) performed based on real time using an RTC (real-time clock) can be exemplified. And, as this RTC-related production, for example, a production performed by deciding a date and a season, a production performed by deciding a time zone of the day, a production performed by a plurality of pachinko gaming machines at the same time, and the like are exemplified. can do. Further, it is possible to exemplify an effect such as a scroll display of a character message indicating that the time zone at that time is in a specific effect mode. It is also possible to output a predetermined BGM as an RTC-related effect for standby.

Further, as another example related to the touch effect of the standby screen B, the one using the above-mentioned movable effect member can be mentioned. Specifically, it is assumed that the movable effect member is displaced from the initial position and reaches the position after driving during the game standby on which the standby screen B is displayed. Further, in the movable effect member, the overlapping portion with the display area (194) of the effect display device (60) is relatively small at the initial position, and the overlapping portion with the display area (194) is relatively large at the rear position after driving. It shall be. Then, the movable effect member may be in a position after being driven, and by detecting a change in touch detection there, the accessory may be returned to the initial position. Further, even if the symbol change starts during the return to the initial position at that time, the return operation of the accessory may not be interrupted.

The above-mentioned "B13: Game standby C (setting screen for effect / sound, etc.)" is, for example, a standby state in which the player sets the effect mode, volume, light intensity, etc. (environment setting) before the start of the game. Means. At this time, the environment setting menu (customization menu) is displayed, and it is possible to shift to the environment setting screen (environment setting display) of the selected type.

FIG. 33 (c) shows an example of the effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of "B13: Game standby C (setting screen for effect / sound, etc.)". In the example of FIG. 33 (c), it is displayed that the environment can be set and the customized mode is set (here, the display is in the upper left corner area). Further, from the top, menus of power saving mode on / off, RTC (real-time clock) effect on / off, volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment, effect frequency adjustment, and customization mode end are arranged in this order.

Further, in the example of FIG. 33 (c), the volume adjustment is performed by using a volume adjustment meter composed of a plurality of (here, nine) rectangular marks arranged between the letters "small" and "large". The player can do it while watching. The volume is represented by the number of rectangular marks on the volume adjustment meter that are highlighted.

Further, in the example of FIG. 33 (c), the light intensity adjustment (which may be the brightness adjustment) is performed by a plurality of (here, 5) rectangular marks arranged between the characters "low" and "high". The player can watch the configured light intensity adjustment meter. Furthermore, the effect frequency adjustment can also be performed by the player while looking at the effect frequency adjustment meter composed of a plurality of (9 in this case) rectangular marks arranged between the characters "low" and "high". It has become. The amount of light and the frequency of effect are represented by the number of rectangular marks displayed in reverse among the rectangular marks on each adjustment meter.

Further, an operation guide display area 363 has appeared, which indicates that the cursor can be moved by the cross key (96) and the determination operation can be performed by the operation button (22). Further, in the lower message display area 364, the flow display of the message "To end, move the cursor to" End of customization mode "(Please)" is displayed.

Here, the transition to such an environment-settable state shall be made, for example, when the effect button (operation button 22 or the like) is operated in the state of the standby screen A shown in FIG. 33 (a). Can be done. In the following, the screen display in the state of "B13: Game standby C (setting screen for production, sound, etc.)" is referred to as "display screen C", "effect setting screen C", "environment setting screen", "customization screen", etc. Sometimes referred to. In the present embodiment, the state in which the "display screen C" is displayed is one of a plurality of game standby states.

As the touch effect in the state of the "display screen C", for example, it is conceivable that the screen display does not change and the voice output such as "Good luck" is performed. By performing the touch effect by the voice output, which is another effect element, without changing the screen display in this way, the influence of the touch effect on the environment setting can be minimized, and the touch effect becomes the environment setting. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent obstacles. As a result, the player can quickly and accurately set the environment while diversifying the touch effect. It is also conceivable to combine touch effects with a predetermined light output.

Although it is possible to perform a touch effect by displaying the screen, the display mode (small, thin, small, thin,) is suppressed so as to prevent the player from giving an unexpected impression by combining with the environment setting. It is considered desirable to perform a touch effect by displaying an image in a display mode such as inconspicuous.

The above-mentioned "B14: game standby (power saving)" means a standby state while the processing for power saving is being executed. As a process for saving power, in the example of "display screen C" in FIG. 33 (c), it is possible to set a state in which the transition is possible when the power saving mode is turned on. In this "B14: game standby (power saving)", for example, an effect output in a mode such as displaying the characters "power saving" in a flowing manner on a black background can be exemplified.

As a touch effect in the state of "B14: game standby (power saving)", for example, the state control during power saving is released, and the effect of "B14: game standby (power saving)" is changed to another state ("standby screen"). It is conceivable to shift to the production related to (B) state, etc.). Further, it is conceivable to further execute the touch effect in the state of the transition destination (here, the state of the "standby screen B").

It is conceivable that the above-mentioned "B2: in-game state" includes the items of "B21: symbol fluctuation state" and "B22: hitting state". Of these, "B21: symbol change state" can be a state in which the display related to the special symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) or the effect is changing. Examples of the effect output related to this "B21: symbol variation state" include those in which all the effect symbols 190a to 190b are changing as shown in FIG. 8 (a), and those shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b). As described above, some effect symbols (190a, 190c) are in a stopped (temporary stop) state, and other effect symbols 190b are in a fluctuating state.

Here, FIG. 37 (a) shows a state in which normal reach has occurred, and FIG. 37 (b) shows a state in which SP (super or special) reach has occurred. Further, in the SP reach screen shown in FIG. 37 (b), the left and right effect symbols 190a and 190c are moved to the upper left and upper right parts of the screen and reduced, a predetermined character appears, and the reduced effect symbol is displayed. A preview image by the sun mark 381 appears at the lower right end of the screen at the upper part of the area 361. The sun mark 381 in the example of FIG. 37 (b) is displayed as if the image object of the fluctuation information display 198 in FIG. 37 (a) has moved and changed its form.

As the touch effect during the normal reach shown in FIG. 37 (a), for example, those shown in order by FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b) can be exemplified. That is, before the touch detection, as shown by the speaker mark 376 that emits a musical note and the lit lamp mark 378 in FIG. 40A, the reach effect by the image display and the reach sound output are performed.

Then, when there is touch detection, as shown in the speaker mark 376 of FIG. 40 (b), in addition to the reach sound, a voice output (touch sound output) indicating that the touch is turned on is performed. .. As the touch sound, a voice output having a content such as "I can't expect it", which suggests the reliability of the reach fluctuation during execution, can be exemplified. Further, as shown in the aspect in which the lamp mark 377 related to the touch notification LED is lit, the light output for the touch effect is performed.

Subsequently, as the touch effect during the SP reach shown in FIG. 37 (b), for example, the player releases his / her hand from the firing handle (20) and changes the state from the state with the touch detection to the state without the touch detection (touch detection “touch detection”. It is possible to exemplify an example in which a character utters a predetermined line (line) when a state change (change of state from “yes” to “no”) is detected. In the example of FIG. 37 (b), the balloon area 382 appears and the characters "heat!" Are displayed. Further, this touch effect is executed as a highly reliable effect that suggests that the expectation for the development of the big hit and the reach is relatively high, and it is easy to appear in the case of the big hit.

Further, when the player releases the firing handle 20 and then grasps the firing handle 20 again during SP reach, a touch like the character display of "heat!" Shown in FIG. 37 (b). It is also possible to perform the production. In this case, it can be said that the touch effect is executed when the state change from the touch detection “none” to “yes” is detected.

Further, the "B22: hitting state" can be a state in which a hit such as a big hit occurs and the game related to the hit is being executed. More specifically, in "B22: hitting state", for example, after the jackpot start demo is displayed to notify that the jackpot game is started, the game is accompanied by the opening of the jackpot. It is possible to do so until the production of the jackpot end demo is completed.

As an example of the effect output related to this "B22: hitting state", the ones shown in FIGS. 37 (c) to 39 can be exemplified. For example, FIG. 38A shows an example of screen display at the time of the big hit start demonstration. At the time of this big hit start demonstration, the characters "BONUS" indicating the occurrence of the big hit and the predetermined characters are displayed in the center of the screen, and the symbol combination related to the big hit generated in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 (here, "333"). ") Is displayed. Further, in the example of FIG. 38 (a), the hold number display area 367 which clearly shows the hold numbers of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is shown. Further, in the example of FIG. 38 (a), as described above, the right-handed guidance display area 383 is displayed as an effect of urging the player to hit right-handed, and the right-handed guidance display area 383 “turns the handle to the right”. The message "Ne" is displayed.

Here, with respect to the above-mentioned reduced effect symbol display area 361, during the change of the decorative symbols (effect symbols 190a to 190c), the variation display by the reduced decorative symbol (reference numeral omitted) is performed even in the reduced effect symbol display area 361. However, even if the decorative symbols (effect symbols 190a to 190c) are in the reach state, it is possible to prevent the reduced decorative symbols (mini symbols) in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 from being in the reach state. Further, in this case, it is possible to limit the display mode of the three reduced decorative symbols in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 to either all of them are fluctuating or all of them are stopped. Is.

Further, the reduced decorative symbol in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 should be displayed during the big hit (here, the period including the entire period from the big hit start demo to the big hit end demo) and during the normal demo display (during the standby screen A). Is possible. Then, when the reduced decorative symbol is displayed during the jackpot, it is possible to display the reduced decorative symbol (for example, in the same combination) corresponding to the decorative symbol that triggered the jackpot. In addition, when the reduced decorative symbol is displayed during the normal demo display, the reduced decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (directed symbols 190a to 190c) that was stopped when the normal demo display is displayed is displayed. It is possible.

FIG. 38 (b) shows an example of a screen during the round displayed during the jackpot game. In the example of FIG. 38 (b), as described above, the story development in which a predetermined character appears is displayed in the center of the screen, and in the lower part of the screen, in addition to the reduced effect symbol display area 361 and the reserved number display area 367. The round number display area 368 and the count number display area 369 are displayed.

In FIGS. 38 (c) and 39 (a) to 39 (c), as described above, the hit-in specific effect screens A to D, which are the hit-in specific effect outputs, are exemplified. Of these, the hit-middle specific effect screen A shown in FIG. 38 (c) is an effect for executing the jackpot game in the 7th round, and is an overall image of the jackpot generated from the 7th round to the 8th round. (Whether or not a probability fluctuation game is given after a big hit, etc.) is suggested or notified.

An image of an answer sheet for the examinations of the two characters "Aoi Kannazuki" and "Haruka Minazuki" is displayed on the hit-and-middle specific production screen A. Furthermore, for one character, "Kannazuki Aoi," the character "65" is displayed as the test score, but for the other character, "Minazuki Haruka," the test score is still displayed. It is in a state where it has not been done. In this way, in the state where the score of "Haruka Minazuki" is not displayed yet, the whole picture of the big hit that occurred (for example, whether or not the probability fluctuation game is given after the big hit) is still conveyed to the player. Therefore, it is unclear whether or not the player can play the game in a relatively advantageous state.

If there is touch detection during the round (7 rounds in this case) at this time, in the example of FIG. 39 (a), "100" is displayed as the test score of "Haruka Minazuki" triggered by the touch detection. (Hitchu specific production screen B). As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the state in which "100" is displayed as the test score of "Haruka Minazuki" is a state in which the player is expected to play the game in a relatively advantageous state. It has become. That is, in the example of FIG. 39 (a), the touch effect (the effect in which the score notation of “100” appears) accompanying the touch detection is performed, so that the effect that arouses the expectation of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is executed. Has been done.

In response to this production, if a value exceeding the score of "Kannazuki Aoi" (here, "65") is not displayed as the test score of "Haruka Minazuki", a revival production etc. will be performed after that. Unless otherwise, the player is notified that the game cannot be played in a relatively advantageous state. If there is no change in touch detection, the score of the "Haruka Minazuki" test will not be displayed in the round. It is also possible to express the score of "Haruka Minazuki" when the player temporarily releases the firing handle (20) and changes the touch detection from "Yes" to "No". In addition, after changing from the touch detection "Yes" to "No" state, the score of "Haruka Minazuki" is displayed in the situation where the launch handle (20) is further grasped and returned to the touch detection "Yes" state. It is also possible to let them do it.

Subsequently, when the big hit game in the 7th round is completed, the hit-middle specific effect screen C shown in FIG. 39B is displayed, and the effect indicating the transition to the 8th round is executed. In the example of FIG. 39 (b), the number of rounds of the next big hit game is notified by the display of "Round 8" in the production showing the story development. As mentioned above, these productions are "productions that arouse the expectation that the player plays a game in a relatively advantageous state", but the relatively advantageous and disadvantageous states are big hits. Examples of the game state that shifts after the end of the game include "advantageous state: probable state / disadvantageous state: non-probable state" and "advantageous state: electric support state / disadvantageous state: non-electric support state".

In addition to the role of suggesting an advantageous state in this way, it may also play a role of suggesting the planned number of prize balls that can be obtained in the current jackpot game. That is, if the score notation is "100", the jackpot round is 10 rounds, and if the score notation is "65" or less, the jackpot round may be 8 rounds.

Furthermore, it may play a role of suggesting whether or not the holding villa is performed (= whether or not the jackpot hold exists among the holds held during the jackpot). In other words, a score notation of "100" suggests that the pending villas will be held, and a score notation of "65" or less suggests that the reserved villas will not be held. May be.

FIG. 39C shows an example of the effect display in the eighth round. In the example shown in FIG. 39 (c), the score of "Kannazuki Aoi" is "65" and the score of "Haruka Minazuki" is "100". This display mode indicates that the player can play in a relatively advantageous state. In the 8th round, unlike the 7th round effect, the overall picture of the big hit (for example, whether or not the probability variation game is given after the big hit) is suggested regardless of whether or not the touch detection is changed. The display mode will be shown. In this way, by changing the touch detection in the 7th round, the overall picture of the big hit (for example, whether or not the probability variation game is given after the big hit) is suggested in advance as compared with the case where the touch detection is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new game property during a big hit, in which the game information can be quickly known by the player's handle operation (presence or absence of touch detection).

Then, when the jackpot game of the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot is completed, the jackpot end demo screen as shown in FIG. 37C described above is displayed. Then, when shifting from the state of the jackpot game to the state of the subsequent game, the display of the jackpot end demo screen ends, and the display shifts to the effect display in a mode corresponding to the subsequent game state.
<< C: Special state (state before touch change) >>

The above-mentioned "C: special state" includes "C1: power failure state", "C2: power failure recovery state", "C3: setting change (probability change) state", and "C4: setting display (1 to 6)". ) Medium state ”. Of these, "C1: power failure state" means a state in which the voltage supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 (here, particularly the main board 102) is reduced and the power supply is cut off.

Further, in this "C1: power cut state", items of "C1B1: game standby state (normal demo display)" and "C1B12: game in progress state" can be provided. Of these, "C1B1: game standby state (normal demo display)" can be considered as the same as the above-mentioned "B1: game standby state".

Specifically, regarding "C1B1: game standby state (normal demo display)", "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" and "B12: game standby B (symbol stop)" of "B1: game standby state". It is possible to classify items such as "Middle)", "B13: Game standby C (setting screen for production / sound, etc.)", and "B14: Game standby (during power saving)". Here, in order to prevent the charts from becoming complicated, the subdivided items for "C1B1: game standby state (normal demo display)" are omitted.

The above-mentioned "C1B12: in-game state" can be considered as the same as the above-mentioned "B2: in-game state". Specifically, regarding "C1B12: in-game state", it is possible to classify items such as "B21: symbol fluctuation state" and "B22: in-game state" of "B2: in-game state". .. Here, in order to prevent the charts from becoming complicated, the illustration of the subdivided items for "C1B12: In-game state" is omitted. Then, in the various states related to the "C: special state" described here, various types are obtained until the touch is detected or until a predetermined condition (time lapse, etc.) is satisfied after the touch is detected. The touch effect is not executed.

The above-mentioned "C2: power failure recovery state" means a state in which the voltage supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 (here, particularly the main board 102) is recovered and the power failure is resolved. This "C2: power failure recovery state" may also be provided with the same "C2B1: game standby state (normal demo display)" and "C2B2: game in progress state" as the above-mentioned "C1: power failure state". it can.

FIG. 35A shows an example of effect output related to the state of “C2B1: game standby state (normal demo display)”. In FIG. 35 (a), the power failure recovery notification area 365 appears in the upper right corner of the display content (standby screen A) in the above-mentioned "B11: Game standby A (normal demo display)" and is "energized." Is displayed.

FIG. 35B shows a display example relating to the state of “C2B2: in-game state”. In the example of FIG. 35 (b), the central message display area 371 appears in the center of the image where the display area of the effect symbols (190a to 190c) appears, and "Energized. The symbol is currently changing. As it is. The message "Games are possible." Is displayed in three stages. That is, in the example of FIG. 35 (b), the power is cut off during the symbol fluctuation, and then the power is restored without performing the RWM clear operation (there is a power failure recovery), and the effect symbols (190a to 190c) are shown. The screen display shows the state in which the display area is displayed and the message display related to energization is added and restarted.

After that, the effect output mode is to restart from the variable display of the effect symbols (190a to 190c) according to the information content transmitted by the command at the time of power failure recovery as described above, and to use a predetermined stop symbol. It is possible to adopt various modes such as restarting from the stop display of the effect symbols (190a to 190c).

Here, even if the touch is detected, the touch effect in the state related to the power failure recovery is not performed until the initialization notification performed at the time of turning on the power is completed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the touch effect from functioning as a misunderstanding for, for example, a game hall clerk or a player with respect to the initialization notification. As the initialization notification at the time of power-up, it is possible to exemplify the display of characters such as "The power is being started. Please wait for a while."

The above-mentioned "C3: state during setting change (probability change)" means that the state during setting change is being made with respect to the above-mentioned setting change. Further, the above-mentioned "C4: Setting display (1 to 6) medium state" means a state in which the numerical value of the set value changed by the operation of changing the setting is being displayed. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6, and the setting display 701 displays a numerical value corresponding to the set value.

As an example of the effect output related to this "C3: setting changing (probability changing) state", as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 36 (c), the characters "setting is being changed" and "setting is being displayed" are displayed. Something like a display can be exemplified. In the effect output example of FIG. 36 (b), the message "The setting is being changed. After the setting change is completed, the frame door is closed to shift to the normal game." Is displayed in the lower message display area 364. .. In the effect output example of FIG. 36 (c), the lower center message display area 370 appears at the lower center of the screen, and "the setting is being changed. After the setting change is completed, the frame door is closed to shift to the normal game. The message "I will do it." Is displayed.

Here, "setting is being changed" means that the current setting value is displayed and the setting can be changed, and "setting is being displayed" means that the current setting value is displayed. However, it means that the settings cannot be changed. More specifically, in "setting display", the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder (809) and the setting value at that time is displayed on the setting display (807), but the setting value is changed. It is in a state where the processing for this cannot be performed. This corresponds to the processing when it is determined that the RWM clear switch has not been input (S133: NO) in the setting change processing shown in FIG.

In addition, the touch effect by the image is not executed in any of the states of "setting is being changed" and "setting is being displayed". Further, in this embodiment, an image showing the state is displayed in the state, but the image may not be displayed at all.
<Production performed based on touch detection>

Subsequently, as the items of the above-mentioned "effect executed based on the touch detection", "D: content of the touch effect" and "E: selection criterion of the touch effect" can be roughly mentioned. Among these, "D: Contents of touch effect" is provided with an item indicating a matter such as what kind of device is used to perform the effect (touch effect) related to the touch operation. In addition, "E: Selection Criteria for Touch Effect" is provided with an item indicating items such as what kind of item is used to select a plurality of various touch effects.
<< D: Contents of touch production >>

The above-mentioned "D: content of touch effect" can be divided into, for example, "D1: output destination of effect", "D2: effect data", and "D3: only state change". Further, as the "D1: output destination of the effect" among these, "D11: speaker", "D12: lamp", and "D13: image display device" can be mentioned. The "D11: speaker" can use the speaker 21 described above, and the "D12: lamp" can use various LEDs for directing. Although the output destinations of the touch effect are listed here, the points such as which output destination is used in what combination in each state of the gaming machine will be described later.

Further, the "D13: image display device" may use the effect display device 60 (including the case where a plurality of display bodies are used). Further, regarding "D13: image display device", items such as "D131: same as the decorative symbol display device" and "D132: separate from the decorative symbol display device" can be provided.

Of these, "D131: Same as the decorative symbol display device" uses the same display device as the effect display device 60 for displaying the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 (FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b)) to perform a touch effect using an image. Means to do. It can be said that the effect output associated with the touch detection as shown in FIG. 34 (b) and the like belongs to the classification of "D131: Same as the decorative symbol display device". Further, "D132: Separate from the decorative symbol display device" is a display device provided separately from the effect display device 60 (for example, a second liquid crystal display device such as one provided on a frame or an LED display device (illustrated). It means that the touch effect is performed by using) etc.).

Regarding the above-mentioned "D2: effect data", items such as "D21: shared with others" and "D22: dedicated" can be provided. Of these, "D21: shared with others" means that the effect data for the touch effect is shared with the effect data for the effect other than the touch effect. Further, "D22: Dedicated" means that the effect data for the touch effect is dedicated and is not shared with the effect data for the effect other than the touch effect.

Here, "shared with the effect data" may include a mode in which a part of the effect data is shared and other effect data is not shared. Furthermore, a production data structure and production mode are also adopted, such as sharing a part of the production data for the touch production with the production data for other productions and dedicating other production data for the touch production. Is possible.

For example, the character display of "welcome" in the touch effect area 362 illustrated in FIG. 34B can be considered to use the effect data dedicated to the touch effect. Further, for example, when the image data used even during the symbol variation is also used as a touch effect, it can be considered that the effect data is shared.

The above-mentioned "D3: change only the state" is, for example, an effect mode in which only the effect mode is changed and a dedicated effect is not performed as a touch effect when a touch is detected, or an effect frequency of appearance as a touch effect. It is possible to exemplify a production mode in which few so-called rare characters and scenes do not appear. And, such "D3: only change the state" can be said to be an example of an effect mode in which "D2: effect data" is set to "D21: shared with other things".
<< E: Touch production selection criteria >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned "E: selection criteria for touch effect" will be described. This "E: touch effect selection criterion" is, in other words, a criterion for selecting what kind of touch effect is to be executed, and in a broad sense, includes whether or not to execute the touch effect. Then, such "E: selection criteria for touch effect" can be divided into, for example, "E1: game state (in touch timing)", "E2: number of operations", and "E3: customized setting". it can. Of these, "E1: game state (at touch timing)" means an effect mode in which a selection target or a selected touch effect differs depending on the game state when touch detection occurs. There is.

Moreover, as this "E1: game state (in touch timing)", "E11: game state related to ball ejection" and "E12: game state not related to ball ejection" can be mentioned. Further, as "E12: game state not related to ball ejection", "E121: RTC", "E122: demo type (B1 type)", "E123: abnormality / error state", "E124: effect button". Operation ”and the like can be exemplified.

Here, it can be said that the above-mentioned "E11: gaming state related to ball ejection" is one of the subdivided states of the above-mentioned "B2: playing state" (FIG. 22). Specifically, "B2: in-game state" includes the items of "B21: symbol fluctuation state" and "B22: hitting state" as described above, and these states include a big hit state and a high hit state. It includes game states such as probability state, electric support state, etc., in which more balls are ejected than in normal times.

The "E121: RTC" related to the above-mentioned "E12: Game state not related to the ball output" is to select whether or not to execute the touch effect and the execution content of the touch effect based on the RTC (real-time clock) that measures the real time. For example, when it is determined that the touch detection has changed at the timing when the time measurement result of the RTC is in a predetermined time zone, it means an effect mode in which the touch effect corresponding to the time measurement result is determined. ing. In addition, "E122: type of demo (type of B1)" is a situation in which one of the various types of demos (B11 to B14) in the above-mentioned "B1: game standby state" is performed. It means an effect mode in which the touch effect is determined with reference to.

Further, the above-mentioned "E123: Abnormality / error state" is what happens when a state that is normally difficult to consider occurs, or when an abnormality or error is detected when touch detection is performed. It means an effect mode in which a touch effect is selected according to whether an abnormality or an error has occurred. Furthermore, as this "E123: abnormal / error state", "E1231: when the ball is in the touch state from the time the power is turned on" or "E1232: when the ball is entered in the non-touch state", which is usually difficult to consider, for example, winning a prize. Unexpected states can be defined as parameters for selection criteria. Then, as a "state in which a prize cannot be expected", touch detection is performed from the starting point to the ball entry timing after the starting point, starting from a predetermined time after the power is turned on or a predetermined time when the standby screen is displayed. It is possible to exemplify a situation where the situation is not met.

Further, in consideration of maintenance of the gaming machine, when the game hall clerk opens the glass door (15) and manually directly wins the starting winning opening (62 or 63) without operating the firing handle (20). There is. Even in such a case, a command is transmitted from the main board (102) to the sub-main board (301), and the effect is executed in the same manner as in a normal game. Then, when touch is detected during the variable display of the symbol, the effect corresponding to the state is output. It can be said that such a state is also included in the above-mentioned "state in which a prize cannot be expected".

The above-mentioned "E1231: In the case of a touch state from the time when the power is turned on" means a situation in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on while the touch sensor (touch switch 310) is touched. In such a situation, even if there is contact with the launch handle (20) before the power is turned on, the touch detection is not continued due to the power failure before the power is turned on, so that a special effect output is obtained. Can be avoided. Alternatively, since such a situation can be considered to be an abnormal power supply startup situation, it is also possible to perform an effect output for notifying that the power supply startup is not normal.

Further, in "E1232: When the ball is entered in the non-touch state", the entry into one of the entry ports (winning openings) is detected in the situation where the contact with the touch sensor (touch switch 310) is not detected. It means such a situation. For example, as such a situation, it is possible to consider the case where there is a fraud involving turning on the power. Then, in such a situation, it is conceivable to perform an effect output for notifying that the power supply is not normally started.

The above-mentioned "E124: operation of the effect button" means a situation in which the operation button 22 is operated and the touch is further detected. For example, the type of touch effect (effect executed based on touch detection) depends on whether or not the effect button (operation button 22 or the like) is operated before the touch effect is executed (within a predetermined period before the touch effect is executed). It is possible to exemplify a control mode in which the presence or absence of execution is determined.

More specifically, if the effect button (operation button 22, etc.) is not operated within a predetermined period (several seconds before) before touch detection, the touch effect by image or voice is executed, and the effect button (operation button) is executed. When 22 etc.) is operated, it can be exemplified that the touch effect is executed only by voice or the touch effect is not executed.

The above-mentioned "E2: number of operations" means an effect mode in which a touch effect is selected based on an operation when the touch operation is repeated a plurality of times within a predetermined period. Further, "E3: Customized setting" means an effect mode in which a touch effect is selected based on the content of customization performed by the above-mentioned environment setting.

Regarding the "effect executed based on touch detection" as described above, when executing various processes based on touch detection, a prize ball is paid out or a symbol game (for a stop result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol). It is also considered that it is preferable not to affect the progress of the game (game that gives profits based on the basis) itself.
<Other processes executed based on touch detection>

Next, as the above-mentioned items of "other processing executed based on touch detection", "F: change of effect state", "G: change of effect", "H: trigger parameter of touch effect""Thingsabout" can be mentioned.
<< E: Touch production selection criteria >>

Among these, "F: change of effect state" can be defined as "F1: accompanied by change of effect state" or "F2: without change of effect state" based on touch detection. As the "F1: accompanied by a change in the effect state", an example of "F11: complete transition" and "F12: return after a certain period * stay for a certain period after the operation effect" can be exemplified.

The above-mentioned "F11: complete transition" means an effect mode in which the original effect state is not returned unless the effect state is changed and the lottery for changing the effect state is won. In addition, the above-mentioned "F12: Return after a certain period * Stay for a certain period after the operation effect" means that after the effect state is changed, the effect state remains after the change for a predetermined time, and the predetermined time elapses. It means a production mode that returns to the original production state.

As the above-mentioned "F2: without changing the production state", in addition to the one without any change in the production state, an example of the production mode such as "F21: without changing the production state under a specific situation" can be exemplified. .. As this "F21: without changing the effect state under a specific situation", the effect state is changed even if there is touch detection under a predetermined (or selected by lottery) specific situation. It is possible to give an effect mode such as not performing the above.
<< G: Change of production >>

The above-mentioned "G: change of effect" indicates what kind of effect is changed based on touch detection, and "G1: change of effect that does not affect the ball output" and "G2: change of effect". It can be divided into "changes in production that affect ball output". Here, "affecting the ball ejection" means, for example, a change in the effect that directly affects the ball ejection, such as a change in the execution control state of the notification effect that is advantageous to the player such as a hitting notification. , The fluctuation time occupied within a certain time differs depending on the fluctuation time, and indirect cases such as the case where the fluctuation efficiency changes are also included.

In other words, if the fluctuation time is short on average, the number of fluctuations within a certain time (for example, 1 hour) can be relatively increased, and the amount of balls to be ejected including the general prize and the big hit is theoretically. It is expected to increase. On the contrary, if the fluctuation time is long on average, the number of fluctuations within a certain period of time is relatively small, and theoretically, the amount of balls to be ejected is considered to be small. The above-mentioned "G1: Change of the effect that does not affect the ball output" and "G2: Change of the effect that affects the ball output" are defined based on such a concept.

And, "G1: change of production which does not affect ball ejection" can be said to be change which does not change fluctuation time on the side of sub-main board 301, but this "G1: change of production which does not affect ball ejection" "G11: Change of notice system", "G12: Change of background, character, etc.", "G13: Change of decorative design (including those attached to the design)" including change of production mode and frequency. , "G14: Change of hold display" and the like can be considered.

The above-mentioned "G11: change of notice system" includes "G111: change of advance notice", "G112: change of change notice", "G113: change of selection ratio", and "G114: change of selection contents". * You can think of things such as "not just frequency". Then, the change relating to "G111: pre-reading notice" means that the effect of the notice in the fluctuation after the fluctuation at that time (the fluctuation) is selected based on the touch detection. Further, the change relating to "G112: the change notice" means that the effect of the notice in the change (the change) at that time is selected based on the touch detection.

FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b) show an example of the production related to "G112: the change notice" in "G11: change of the notice system". FIG. 41 (a) shows an effect display example before the notice (touch notice) related to the touch effect is executed, and FIG. 41 (b) shows an effect display example when the touch notice is performed. ing. Of these, in FIG. 41 (a), a cat character 384 holding a fish during normal reach appears in the center of the screen as an expectation suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit due to fluctuations during execution. , The degree of expectation differs depending on the color and type of fish that the cat character 384 that appeared is holding, and the color and type of fish according to the progress of the pattern, such as the screen switching timing after reach and the passage of time ( The degree of expectation of the notice) is configured to change step by step.

In this state, if there is no change in touch detection, the cat character 384 remains as it is, and while moving to the left of the screen according to the content determined at the time of determining the content of the notice, according to the progress of the above-mentioned symbol. The expectation suggestion effect is performed so as to change (or not change) the color of the fish. On the other hand, if there is a change in touch detection after the appearance of the cat character 384, the cat character 384 changes to the monster character 385 (touch change) as shown in FIG. 41 (b), and the changed monster character. Change the effect to move 385 to the left of the screen. At this time, the cat character 384 is changed to the monster character 385 having an expectation degree corresponding to the color of the fish (for example, when the fish color is blue, the body color is a blue beast).

If it is planned to change the expectation of the notice according to the progress of the subsequent symbols (the color of the fish is from blue to red, the reliability of each color will be described later), as a benefit due to the change in touch detection. , It is possible to have a monster character 385 with a color (eg, yellow or red) within the expected post-change expectations when the character changes. Further, as the expected degree of advance notice, it is possible to provide a plurality of different types of characters such as the cat character 384 and the monster character 385, so that the expected degree of jackpot and reach development is different.

For example, as the fish held by the cat character 384, colored ones such as red, yellow, blue, and white are provided so that the above-mentioned expectations increase in order from white to red, and also for the monster character 385. , Red, yellow, blue, white, etc. are provided as monsters so that the above expectations increase in order from white to red, but in addition to this, the size, type, and fish of cats and monsters It is conceivable to express the degree of expectation by combining the color with the accompanying items such as.

Furthermore, with touch detection, the color of the fish added by the cat character 384 changes to one with high expectations, and the color of the monster character 385 that appeared by touch detection changes in color by the second and subsequent touch detections. It is possible to control the effect so as to cause. It is also possible to adopt an effect control mode in which the color of the monster character 385 is sequentially changed by repeating the second and subsequent touch detections. Further, as a preliminary effect, it is possible to perform the above-mentioned effect control by making the monster character 385 appear from the beginning without making the cat character 384 appear.

It is also preferable to output characters and voices that teach that the character may change or the reliability notification may change when there is a change in touch detection. It is possible to promote the experience of a new game effect by operation. Further, as "G11: Change of notice system", after the notice being executed is changed due to the change of touch detection, after the change of touch detection, a predetermined condition (for example, touch again during reach after the next fluctuation) Until the achievement is achieved (such as when there is a change in detection, when a big hit is performed, when a predetermined game standby demo is entered, etc.), the effect using the cat character 384 is changed to the effect using the monster character 385. Is changed to. In addition, based on the change in touch detection, the content is changed from the running notice, but when the touch detection changes, a notification or suggestion such as "The notice character will be changed from the next fluctuation" is shown. It is also possible to execute and change the corresponding notice character or the like from the next fluctuation.

Further, the above-mentioned "G113: change of selection ratio" means that an effect lottery for changing the selection frequency of various effects is performed. In addition to the selection frequency (selection ratio) of various effects, "G114: Change of selection contents * not only frequency" is the effect of the background, characters, etc. used for the effect on the sub-main board 301 side. It means that the content (effect component) is changed within the range in which the fluctuation time does not change, based on the touch detection. In other words, this is a change that maintains the fluctuation time to the "change of notice due to the details of the production (specific notice)" that is determined on the sub-control side when executing the same fluctuation pattern. You can also say that.

42 (a) to 42 (d) schematically show an example of a selection table related to the advance notice effect before and after the touch change. Of these, FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b) show a selection table relating to the notice effect (the change notice effect) regarding the change result (win / fail lottery result) at that time, and FIGS. 42 (c) and 42 (c). (D) shows a selection table related to the advance notice effect (look-ahead advance notice effect) regarding the fluctuation result (win / fail lottery result) from the next time onward. Further, FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b) show a selection table for a predetermined advance notice group (here, the advance notice group α), and FIGS. 42 (c) and 42 (d) show other predetermined notice groups. The selection table for the notice group (here, the notice group β) is shown.

Further, FIG. 42 (a) shows an example of a selection table for the advance notice effect in each variation before touch detection, and FIG. 42 (b) shows a selection table for the advance notice effect in each change after touch detection. An example is shown. Similarly, FIG. 42 (c) shows an example of a selection table related to a look-ahead notice effect before touch detection, and FIG. 42 (d) shows an example of a selection table related to a look-ahead notice effect after touch detection. ..

In order not to complicate the explanation here, each of the notices in FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (d) is one of the notices A to D, and there may be cases where these notices are not given. It is supposed to be. Further, the symbols "A" to "D" in the notices A to D do not represent differences in the contents of the notices, and are used to distinguish the types of notices in the selection tables of FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (d). belongs to.

For example, it is determined that the used image and the effect mode of the notice A shown in FIG. 42 (a) are not the same as the used image and the effect mode of the notice A shown in FIGS. 42 (b) to 42 (d) in principle. Has been done. This also applies to notice C to notice D. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the same used image and the effect mode may be adopted between the notices in which the symbols (A to D) are the same in each selection table.

Further, taking the chart of FIG. 42A as an example, columns (rows) of 0 to 5, 10 to 30, and 31 or more are provided as fluctuation pattern numbers. As for the notice A, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a ratio of 40%, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a ratio of 40%, and the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and above are selected at a ratio of 20%. It has become like.

As for the notice B, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a ratio of 14%, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a ratio of 35%, and the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and above are selected at a ratio of 35%. It has become like. Further, with respect to the notice C, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a ratio of 1%, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a ratio of 10%, and the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and above are selected at a ratio of 44%. It has become like.

Further, regarding the notice D, the selection ratio is 0% for any of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30, and the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and above. Is not done. Further, the rate at which the notice is not given is 45% for the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, 15% for the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30, and 1% for the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and above. There is.

The relationship between the fluctuation pattern, notice, and selection ratio as described above is defined as follows. That is, here, 100 fluctuation patterns having fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 99 are provided. The above-mentioned fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, 10 to 30, 31 and above are included in the fluctuation patterns 0 to 99.

Here, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are non-reach fluctuations (for example, the fluctuation pattern random numbers in FIG. 11A are 1500 to 49999 out of 5000 to 49999), which are fluctuations that do not reach. , The fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 6 to 9 are also non-reach fluctuations, but are related to the special non-reach fluctuations to which the above-mentioned notice group α is not suitable (for example, the fluctuation pattern random number in FIG. 11A is 5000). It is 12500 to 14999 out of ~ 49999). Further, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 relate to reach fluctuations (here, referred to as “weak SP reach”) which are out of alignment and have relatively low jackpot reliability (for example, in FIG. 11A). The fluctuation pattern random number is 5000 to 12499 out of 5000 to 49999), and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 to 49 is an outlier and has a relatively high jackpot reliability (here, "strong SP reach"). (For example, the fluctuation pattern random number in FIG. 11A is 0 to 4999).

Further, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 50 to 99 are hit fluctuations that are hits. The fluctuation pattern numbers 50 to 99 include those for reach fluctuations that are indistinguishable from the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 49 up to the middle stage, and special hits that are different from the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 49. Fluctuations and are included. In order not to complicate the explanation here, notice A is a "weak notice" with a relatively low jackpot expectation, notice B is a "medium notice" with a medium jackpot expectation, and notice C is a jackpot. It is assumed that the expectation is relatively high "weak notice".

Based on these, the selection ratio of the notice group α by the selection table shown in FIG. 42A will be described. According to the example shown in FIG. 42 (a), the fluctuation (the fluctuation) at that time is based on the fluctuation pattern 5 (the fluctuation pattern having the fluctuation pattern number 5) before the change processing of the notice group selection ratio by the touch detection. In the case of fluctuation (non-reach symbol fluctuation), the selection ratio of the notice group α is 40% for the probability of executing the notice A, 14% for the probability of executing the notice B, and 1% for the probability of executing the notice C. The probability of not executing the notice of the notice group α is 45%.

Similarly, when the fluctuation is a symbol fluctuation of weak SP reach based on the fluctuation pattern 30 (the fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation pattern number 30), the selection ratio of the notice group α is that the probability of executing the notice A is 40%, and the notice is given. The probability of executing B is 35%, the probability of executing notice C is 10%, and the probability of not executing the notice of the notice group α is 15%.

Similarly, when the fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern 31 (strong SP reach) or a symbol fluctuation (hit fluctuation) based on the fluctuation pattern 50, the selection ratio of the notice group α is that the probability of executing the notice A is 20% and the notice B is executed. The probability of executing the notice C is 35%, the probability of executing the notice C is 44%, and the probability of not executing the notice of the notice group α is 1%.

In the example of FIG. 42 (a), since the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern is determined in this way, the notice A of the notice group α is the case where the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern having the highest selection rate is selected. However, it can be said that it is highly likely to be executed (40% at the time of non-reach loss). Therefore, it can be said that the notice A of the notice group α is a notice with a higher expectation of hitting than the case without a notice, but an extremely low expectation.

On the other hand, for example, the notice C of the notice group α is extremely unlikely to be executed in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach out-of-reach with the highest selection rate (1% at the time of the non-reach out of reach), and is in the case of strong SP reach or hit. Since it is a notice that is easy to execute, it can be said that it is a notice with a high degree of expectation.

It should be noted that the fluctuation patterns having the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 49 have different selection rates at the time of deviation. For example, the ratio of selecting any of the fluctuation patterns 0 to 5 is 80% at the time of deviation, and the ratio of selecting any of the fluctuation patterns 6 to 9 is 10 at the time of deviation. %. Further, the ratio of selecting any of the fluctuation patterns 10 to 30 is 9% at the time of disconnection, and the ratio of selecting any of the fluctuation patterns 31 to 49 is 1% at the time of deviation. is there. Further, any of the fluctuation patterns 50 to 99 is selected only at the time of hit.

Therefore, for convenience of explanation here, assuming that the hit probability is 1/100, the possibility that the notice A will appear at the time of deviation is 80% of the selected ratio for the fluctuation patterns 0 to 5. , The product of 40% based on the table of FIG. 42A gives 32% (= 80% × 40%). Further, for the fluctuation patterns Nos. 10 to 30, the product of 9% of the selected ratio and 40% based on the table of FIG. 42A gives 3.6% (9% × 40%). Further, for the fluctuation patterns 31 to 49, the product of 1% of the selected ratio and 20% based on the table of FIG. 42 (a) is 0.2% (= 1% × 20%). ..

On the other hand, the possibility that the notice A will appear at the time of hit is 0.2% by the product of 1% of the ratio selected for the fluctuation patterns 50 to 99 and 20% based on the table of FIG. 42 (a). 1% x 20%). From these things, the ratio that the notice A is executed for one fluctuation is 36% (= 32% + 3.6% + 0.2% + 0.2%).

In this way, since the rate at which the notice A is selected at the time of hitting is only 0.2%, the reliability at the time when the notice A appears (when it is unknown whether it will be a hit or a miss) is 0. It is about 0.4% (= 0.2% + 0.2%).

On the other hand, after touch detection, the selection table shown in FIG. 42 (b) is used. In this selection table, regarding the notice A, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are 40%, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are 0%, and the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and above are 20%. It is supposed to be selected.

As for the notice B, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a ratio of 0%, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a ratio of 70%, and the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and above are selected at a ratio of 9%. It has become like. Further, regarding the notice C, the selection ratio is 0% for all of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30, and the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and above, so that they are not selected. It has become.

Regarding the notice D, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a ratio of 0%, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a ratio of 29%, and the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and above are selected at a ratio of 70%. It has become like. Further, the rate at which the notice is not given is 59% for the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, 1% for the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30, and 1% for the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and above. There is.

Then, for example, when the notice B appears in the fluctuation pattern No. 10 or more, the benefit beyond the reach is confirmed for the player, and the reliability is higher than the notice B (strong SP reach or the ratio selected at the time of hit). Notice D can be newly selected as a production. Therefore, after the touch detection, it is possible to change the content and reliability of various notices selected in the notice group α as compared with those before the touch detection.

As for the look-ahead notice group β, similarly to the notice group α shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), it is possible to make the selection ratio different before and after the touch detection (FIG. 42 (c), FIG. (D)). Further, in the case of the pre-reading notice shown in FIGS. 42 (c) and 42 (d), the sub-main board is based on the pre-reading command (having the pre-reading code information) which is the advance notification information from the main board (102). The variation pattern number is specified by the CPU 521 of the 301.

In addition, the selection ratio explained here is designed by the designer with the optimum balance based on the idea of how much the reliability of various notices should be, and is limited to the numerical values and balances exemplified. It's not a thing. For example, it is possible to change the numerical values explained here, but to make the magnitude relation of the numerical values the same as those explained here.

The above-mentioned "G12: change of background, character, etc." means that the background, character, etc. are changed based on touch detection with respect to the effect other than the advance notice system effect. In addition, the above-mentioned "G13: change of decorative design (including those attached to the design)" means that the effect design 190 is different from the one having a different design or classification based on the touch detection. To do. Further, the "things attached to the symbol" may include a part other than the element symbol which is the symbol element effect symbol described above (element symbol which is a non-symbol element effect symbol) and the like.

The above-mentioned "G14: change of hold display" displays the hold display on the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 shown in FIGS. 8A, 8B, 33B, and the like. , Means to change based on touch detection. As a change of the hold display, it is conceivable to change various display modes such as design and arrangement (for example, from the round design of FIG. 8 (a) to the star design of FIG. 33, etc.). It is also conceivable to change the arrangement of the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197.

Examples of the above-mentioned "G2: change of effect affecting ball output" include "G21: change of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time)" and "G22: execution of notification (AT system function)". .. Among these, as "G21: change of fluctuation pattern (variation time)", "G211: change of selection ratio" and "G212: change of selection content * not only frequency" can be considered.

The above-mentioned "G211: change of selection ratio" means that the variation pattern lottery for changing the selection frequency of each variation pattern that defines the variation time is performed. In addition, "G212: Change of selection content * not only frequency" means that not only the selection frequency of various fluctuation patterns but also the fluctuation time itself to be selected is changed, and as described above, the selection frequency (selection) of various effects. In addition to (ratio), on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to change the effect content (effect component) such as the background and characters used for the effect to something that changes the fluctuation time based on touch detection. Means. In other words, this is a change that changes the fluctuation time to the "change of notice due to the details of the production (specific notice)" that is determined on the sub-control side when executing the same fluctuation pattern. It can be said that there is.

The above-mentioned "G22: execution of notification (AT system function)" means that a predetermined notification is executed based on touch detection. For example, an AT that is often used in a spinning machine. It is conceivable to use touch detection in combination with a game characteristic similar to (assist time).

More specifically, for example, the effect display device 60 presents the operation timing of the touch sensor (touch switch 310), and the effect is developed by performing touch detection at the timing. Furthermore, notification of the launch direction (right-handed or left-handed, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, notification of the launch timing (such as "hit!" Or "stop!") That is advantageous to the player, or a combination thereof , A device that notifies a combination of these and a time element (such as "Right-handed start!" After XX seconds) can be exemplified.
<< H: Trigger parameters for touch effect >>

Among the processes executed based on the touch detection, the above-mentioned "H: related to the trigger parameter of the touch effect" includes "H1: processing of the timekeeping timer (addition / subtraction / clearing, etc.)" and "H2: touch detection". You can think of things like "processing of the number of times (addition / subtraction / clearing)" and "H3: others". The "trigger parameter" referred to here means a parameter (element of a predetermined variable) that is calculated or set with the touch detection as an opportunity and is related to the execution of the touch effect.

More specifically, the above-mentioned "H1: Timekeeping timer processing (addition / subtraction / clearing, etc.)" is used for executing a touch effect and whether or not it is effective as an effect trigger (touch effect). It means the processing of the timekeeping means), and specifically, the timer value that determines whether or not the next touch detection is regarded as an effective execution trigger of the effect when the touch detection is used. It means something like adding, subtracting, or clearing. For example, as an example corresponding to the "specific conditions" shown in "Pros and cons of executing the effect" (FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b)) described later, the operation of the effect button (operation button 22, etc.) is one of the control states. In such a case, the processing related to the time after the operation of the effect button (operation button 22 etc.) corresponds to "H1: Timekeeping timer processing (addition / subtraction / clear etc.)" here. It becomes a thing.

The above-mentioned "H2: processing of the number of touch detections (addition / subtraction / clearing)" performs processing related to the number of touch detections in a predetermined period, and adds, subtracts, clears, or the like the counter value related to the counting of the number of times. Means something. Further, the above-mentioned "H3: Other" is a trigger parameter other than "H1: Timekeeping timer processing (addition / subtraction / clear, etc.)" and "H2: Touch detection count processing (addition / subtraction / clear)". It means something that can be.

For example, in the above-mentioned "F: change of effect state" and "G: change of effect", when the effect state and the effect / variation pattern are changed, the effect at that time is performed on the CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301. Processes such as recognizing and grasping the selected state and updating information related to the production are executed, and the processes necessary for grasping and updating these are exemplified as corresponding to "H3: Other". Can be done.

More specifically, for example, as a control mode included in the above-mentioned "F21: No change in the effect state under a specific situation", it is assumed that the touch effect is not executed in the four fluctuations after the end of the big hit. Then, in such a process, a process for confirming the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot can be exemplified as corresponding to "H3: Other".

In addition to this, in a gaming machine having a control mode in which the touch effect is not executed during the symbol change or a specific effect period, the touch effect can be executed when the touch is detected (the situation where the execution is restricted). It is also possible to exemplify the process of confirming whether or not.

Further, regarding the "specific conditions" shown in "Pros and cons of executing the effect" (FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b)) described later, the effect is executed when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no". At the same time, when the "specific condition" is "under a hit situation", the process of determining whether or not the symbol variation currently being executed at that time is a hit is referred to as "H3: Other". It corresponds to.
<Direction permission / regulatory conditions>
<< J: Setting of permission timing >>

Next, the above-mentioned "production permission / regulation conditions" will be described. First, the "effect permission / regulation condition" not only immediately executes the effect based on the touch detection, but also the effect based on the touch detection, even if the touch detection is changed under each game situation. Means the conditions used to determine whether or not to allow the execution of. That is, it is stipulated that the touch effect is executed as the game state, and the effect is executed when the touch detection is changed while satisfying the present effect permission / regulation conditions. It has become. Then, as an item of "production permission / regulation condition", "J: setting of permission timing" can be mentioned, and this "J: setting of permission timing" is triggered by touch detection to perform a predetermined production or game state. It means that the permit conditions and regulatory conditions of are lifted. Further, this "J: setting of permission timing" can be classified into "J1: internal timer" and "J2: compound with other elements".

Among these, as "J1: internal timer", those having "J11: characteristic in time (comparison with variable / 1 fluctuation)" can be exemplified. For example, a management timer for managing the execution enablement (permission) of the touch effect can be provided, and this management timer can be referred to as an "internal timer". This management timer (internal timer) can be considered to be included in the timekeeping timer in the above-mentioned "H1: Timekeeping timer processing (addition / subtraction / clearing, etc.)". Then, using this management timer (internal timer), it is possible to manage the pros and cons of executing the touch effect (also referred to as "possible" or "presence") and the regulation of the touch effect (also referred to as "constraint"). Is possible.

Further, regarding this internal timer (management timer), in addition to the one that manages a certain time, a "variable" one can be considered. As this "variable" thing, for example, a thing that changes a time determined for executing a touch effect by some condition can be considered. Then, as the "some condition", it is possible to exemplify that the time allowed for the execution of the touch effect is different between the first detection and the second detection.

Further, assuming that there is "comparison with 1 fluctuation", the timer (time) for allowing the touch effect can be selected in the gaming machine, or the fluctuation pattern having the longest fluctuation time that can be selected at that time. However, it is possible to exemplify that a long time is set. Then, it can be said that the determination of the effect output mode based on the touch detection as described above makes the touch detection a control element of permission and regulation related to the output of the effect.

In this case, it is possible to optimize the opportunity to execute the touch effect. That is, in recent symbol games, as the longest fluctuation time, symbol fluctuations that exceed, for example, 180 seconds (symbol fluctuations with high expectations such as "Super 1" in FIG. 11) are generally performed. On the other hand, if the time for which the touch effect is permitted to be executed is not provided longer than such a time, the opportunity for the touch effect to be executed may be lost. Therefore, based on the relationship with the time of one fluctuation, the opportunity to execute the touch effect is appropriately set by permitting the execution of the touch effect after the lapse of a time shorter than the above-mentioned long time (180 seconds, etc.). It is possible to effectively utilize the touch effect.

The above-mentioned "J2: compound with other elements" includes "J21: presence / absence of operation of production button", "J22: presence / absence of twisting operation of handle", "J23: command from main board", "J24: game". It can be divided into the items of "machine status (situation)", which means that the touch effect is permitted or regulated in combination with one or more of these elements. Of these, "J21: presence / absence of operation of the effect button" determines the conditions for permitting or restricting the combination of the operation of the operation button (effect button) 22 and the touch operation. It means something like an element to do.

The above-mentioned "J22: presence / absence of twisting operation of the handle" is a combination of the twisting operation of the firing handle 20 and the touch operation as a condition of permission and regulation of the production, and "J23: command from the main board" is the main. It means that the reception of a predetermined command from the board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is subject to the combination of the touch operation and the reception.

As the above-mentioned "J24: state (situation) of the gaming machine", "J241: special state such as abnormality", "J242: game standby state", and "J243: specific production state (subdivided)" are mentioned. be able to. Of these, "J241: Special state such as abnormality" means that touch detection was performed in a state where an error was detected or in a special situation where a situation that is unlikely to occur in normal games occurred. It means something like a condition.

The above-mentioned "J242: game standby state" means that, for example, the presence of touch detection in each state in the above-mentioned "B1: game standby state" is a condition for permission or regulation of production. .. Further, the above-mentioned "J243: specific effect state (subdivided)" means that the presence of touch detection during various effect states is a condition for permission or regulation of the effect. ing.

For example, in the case of "B1: Standby state (normal demo display)", the effect is produced according to the effect states of "B11: Game standby A (normal demo display)" to "B14: Game standby (power saving)". Examples of those that permit or regulate the above. In addition, in the case of "B2: in-game state", the effect is permitted or regulated according to the effect state (point of which effect mode the player is staying in) related to "B21: symbol change state". It can be illustrated. Furthermore, in the case of "B22: Hitting", the production is permitted or regulated according to the production state (effect pattern) during the hit, and the probability variation hit or normal hit is distinguished and the number of consecutive villas is determined. Examples include those that permit or regulate production.

The "permission" and "regulation" described here are not limited to permitting (all permitting) or regulating (all regulating) all the elements in the production. For example, one of a plurality of types of effects that may be executed as a touch effect depending on the state of the pachinko gaming machine 10 at that time is permitted (partially permitted) or regulated (partially regulated). It is also possible to.

It is also possible to combine this "J2: compound with other elements" with, for example, the above-mentioned "J1: internal timer". In this case, the operation buttons (22) and the like are produced before the predetermined elapsed time reaches the predetermined time (about 20 seconds, etc.) in the game standby state (“B11: Game standby A (normal demo display)”, etc.). It exemplifies that when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (20 seconds, etc.) even when the operation unit is operated, the output of the effect (standby screen B, etc.) triggered by the subsequent touch detection is allowed. it can. Here, the above-mentioned "predetermined time" is, for example, assuming that the time required to execute the corresponding touch effect is 6 seconds, the 6-second touch effect is executed a predetermined time (for example, a plurality of times such as 3 times). It is conceivable that the period is possible (here, about 20 seconds).

Further, the internal timer is used regardless of whether the recovery is performed by a normal recovery operation (return when NO in S111 or S113) or a specific recovery operation (return operation when YES in S113) when the power is restored. It is also possible to set the time counting time of the above to a predetermined value (such as 20 seconds which is the above-mentioned "predetermined time").
<Other 1>
<< K: Change in touch state >>

Subsequently, examples of the above-mentioned "Other 1" item include "K: change in touch state", "L: touch detection method", and "M: transmission method to sub". Of these, "K: change in touch state" means that the presence or absence of contact with the touch sensor (touch switch 310) is utilized for game control. Then, regarding "K: change in touch state", "K1: non-touch ⇒ touch" and "K2: touch ⇒ non-touch" can be considered.

Of these, "K1: non-touch ⇒ touch" means that the state of non-touch not touching the touch sensor (310) changes to the state of touch touching the touch sensor (310). Further, "K2: touch ⇒ non-touch" means that the state of touch touching the touch sensor (310) changes to the state of non-touch not touching the touch sensor (310).
<< L: Touch detection method >>

The above-mentioned "L: touch detection method" means that the difference in the mode in which touch detection is performed is utilized for game control. Then, regarding "L: touch detection method", "L1: touch only" and "L2: including steering wheel operation" can be considered. Of these, "L1: touch only" means that the game control is performed only on the condition that the touch sensor (310) is operated. Further, "L2: including the handle operation" means that the game control is performed on the condition that both the operation on the touch sensor (310) and the rotation operation of the launch handle 20 are performed. When "L1: Touch only" is adopted for the pachinko gaming machine 10, the touch detection process can be easily performed. Further, when "L2: Including steering wheel operation" is adopted, it is possible to prevent a player from accidentally touching the firing handle (20), for example, to perform a touch effect, which is more accurate. In addition, it becomes possible to grasp the player's intention to start the game and utilize it for the subsequent processing.
<< M: Sending method to sub >>

The above-mentioned "M: transmission method to the sub" means a matter such as when to transmit the touch signal detected by the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. As for "M: transmission method to sub", "M1: constant transmission in principle (main ⇒ sub)" and "M2: transmission by grasping the situation (main ⇒ sub)" can be considered.

Of these, "M1: Always transmit in principle (main ⇒ sub)" transmits a touch signal (including a signal representing the content of the touch signal) from the main board 102 to the sub-main unless there are special circumstances such as a communication abnormality. It means that it is always transmitted to the board 301. Further, in "M2: grasping the situation and transmitting (main ⇒ sub)", the main board 102 determines the situation at that time, grasps the situation, and then, in a predetermined predetermined case, a touch signal ( (Including a signal representing the content of the touch signal) is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301.
<Usage form related to changes in touch state>
<< Pros and cons of directing >>

Next, the result of examining a specific form for utilizing the change in the touch state for the effect control will be described. FIGS. 24A and 24B are a list of pros and cons of performing the effect when a change in the touch state is detected in various gaming states. Here, "the pros and cons of the production" can be rephrased as, for example, "whether or not the production is possible" or "presence or absence of the production".

For example, FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b) show the "change state", the "number of changes, etc.", the "target", and the "state of the gaming machine" from the left of the chart. Of these, the upper row in the "changed state" represents the case where the touch detection changes from the "none" state to the "yes" state, and the lower row represents the case where the touch detection changes from the "yes" state to the "none" state. It represents the case where it changes to the state.

The above-mentioned "number of changes, etc." represents an item regarding the number of times the state of the touch signal changes. Then, "first time" represents the first change of the touch signal, and "after a predetermined time" represents a state change after the second time. Further, the "specific condition" represents a specific condition other than the number of changes, and it is shown that there was an operation of the operation button 22 or the like as an example.

Here, as the "state change" or "change", for example, the change from the on state (or off state) of the touch signal to the off state (or on state) can be exemplified. Further, the strength of the touch signal (for example, the height of the voltage) can be changed stepwise, and can be referred to as "state change" or "change" including the stepwise change. In addition, each item such as "first time" in this "number of changes, etc." is when the touch detection changes from the "none" state to the "yes" state, and when the touch detection changes from the "yes" state to the "no" state. It is common to all cases where the state changes to.

As the above-mentioned "object", "image", "sound", and "lamp" can be considered. The contents of these items can be the same as those of "D13: image display device", "D11: speaker", and "D12: lamp" of "D1: output destination of effect" shown in FIG. .. Further, these items of "image", "sound", and "lamp" are commonly defined for each item such as "first time" in "number of changes".

As described above, the changes in touch detection include the change when the player changes from the state where the launch handle 20 is grasped to the state where the launch handle 20 is released, and the state where the player grips the launch handle 20 from the state where the launch handle 20 is not grasped. There are two cases of change, and the operation may be performed a plurality of times during a certain period of time, for example, during the same gaming state. Furthermore, a specific condition is satisfied at a completely unpredictable timing, such as a situation in which an effect button (operation button 22, etc.) is operated, and touch detection occurs before or after the occurrence of a situation in which the specific condition is satisfied. May change. Therefore, in the following, the presence / absence of execution and the content of execution are determined for the touch effect according to each state of the gaming machine, the mode of change in touch detection, whether or not it is under specific conditions, etc., and reference to FIG. 24 for the determined content. I will explain while doing it.

FIG. 24 shows the case where the touch detection changes in a predetermined mode under normal conditions (non-specific conditions) in each state of the gaming machine (shown as “state of the gaming machine”), and the touch detection under specific conditions. It is a chart of the concept of touch effect to be executed when. The above-mentioned "state of the gaming machine" includes "setting change relationship", "waiting for game", "during symbol change" shown in FIG. 24 (a), and "hit" and "hit" shown in FIG. 24 (b). "During probabilistic change (electric support)" can be mentioned. Of these, "setting change-related" defines "setting change in progress" and "setting display in progress" related to the above-mentioned setting change. The above-mentioned "setting change in progress" indicates a situation in which the setting change is started and the setting is changed, and "setting display in progress" indicates a situation in which the setting value is displayed.

Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), the symbols “◯”, “Δ”, and “x” are used. Of these, the symbol "○" indicates that the production by the equipment listed in "Target" is "executed". Furthermore, the symbol of "△" indicates that the effect of the "target" device may be "executed (including the concept of executing under certain conditions or executing only a part of the device)". The symbol "x" indicates "do not execute". Here, the "constant condition" related to the symbol "Δ" indicates, for example, that it is limited to the case of winning the lottery with a predetermined probability. Then, as the lottery with a predetermined probability, in addition to the lottery in which the winner is won with a common probability regardless of the set value, the lottery in which the winning ratio is different for each set value (FIG. 12) can be exemplified.
<<< Setting change relationship >>

Then, as shown in FIG. 24A, when the state of the gaming machine is "setting change related" (either "setting is being changed" or "setting is being displayed"), touch detection is performed for the first time. When the change from "no" to "yes" or "yes" to "no" (in the case of "first time"), a part of the LEDs ("lamps") provided on the gaming machine frame or the gaming board was used. The touch effect is executed (indicated by “Δ”), and the touch effect by the liquid crystal display device (“image”) and the speaker (“voice”) is controlled not to be executed. On the other hand, if the change in the touch state is detected for the first time and then the change in the touch state is detected again (when it is indicated as "after the predetermined time"), only the touch effect by "image" and "voice" is required. However, it is configured so that the touch effect using a part of the "lamp" is not executed (indicated by "x"). Furthermore, under "specific conditions" such as after the effect buttons (operation buttons 22 etc.) are operated while the settings are being changed or the settings are displayed, the touch effect is executed even when a change in the touch state is detected for the first time. Control so that it is not done (indicated by "x"). That is, in the setting change state, the output of the effect based on the detection by the touch detection means is not performed regardless of the change mode of the detection state of the touch detection means and / or the detection mode of the rotation operation detection means. It is possible.

As described above, in the example of FIG. 24A, when the state is related to the setting change such as "setting is being changed" or "setting is being displayed", is the touch effect not executed even if the touch is detected? , Even if it is executed, it is configured so that only the effect of notifying the touch detection is executed. By doing so, the touch effect does not interfere with the setting confirmation and the setting change work, and it is possible to confirm whether the touch detection is normally performed even during the setting change work.
<<< Waiting for a game >>>

Among the above-mentioned "states of gaming machines", "waiting for game" includes "demo screen", "adjustment screen", "variable standby screen", "initialization notification (middle)", and "abnormality notification (middle)". Can be mentioned. Of these, the "demo screen" is the display state of the above-mentioned "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)", and the "adjustment screen" is "B13: game standby C (production) related to environment settings (customization) such as volume. -The display state of "Voice setting screen)" and the "Variable standby screen" correspond to the display state of "B12: Game standby B (design stopped)".

Further, the above-mentioned "initialization notification" during the game standby means that the initialization notification period is in progress, and the above-mentioned "C2B1: power failure recovery state and game standby state" and subsequent initialization Corresponds to the state during the execution period of the notification.

Further, the above-mentioned "abnormality notification" during the game standby is referred to as an error ("recoverable error" or the like) that can restore the control state of the gaming machine to the normal state without turning on the power again if the error is canceled. It means that the notification of (possible) is in progress, and corresponds to the state in the above-mentioned "B1: game standby state" and during the execution period of the notification of the returnable error.

As shown in FIG. 24 (a), during the game standby displaying the "demo screen", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, "image", "sound", and so on. Control to execute a touch effect using a "lamp" (indicated by "○"). In addition, when the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time (after the predetermined number of times), under certain conditions (for example, for each set value). It is controlled so that the touch effect by "voice" is executed by the provided lottery result based on the winning ratio (indicated by "△"). Furthermore, under "specific conditions" such as after the effect button is operated during the game standby displaying the "demo screen", the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time. However, it is controlled so that only the touch effect by voice is executed without executing the touch effect using "image" and "lamp" which is usually performed (indicated by "△").

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", it is controlled so that the touch effect is not executed even if the change is "first time" (indicated by "x"). .. The same conditions also apply to specific conditions such as when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" a predetermined number of times or more (for example, twice or more) or after the effect button is operated while waiting for the game. Control so that the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" are not executed, as in the case when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" (indicated by "x"). ..

As described above, in the example of FIG. 24A, when the demo screen is being displayed, the touch effect is executed when the touch detection generated at the end of the game changes from “yes” to “no”. On the other hand, it is configured to execute a touch effect when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", and a fraudulent device that forcibly enables touch detection (for example, a handle and a game island) It is possible to preferably prevent the touch effect from being executed when the device for connecting the ground wire to each of the metal so as to conduct the metal) is removed. Further, only when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" under a predetermined condition, it is configured so that the game entertainment can be further improved by executing a touch effect different from the usual one. Further, in particular, when the touch effect is used as the effect at the start of the game, the touch effect is omitted when the player indicates the intention of the game by operating the effect button or the like to meet the needs of the player. It is possible to suppress the execution of effects that do not follow.

Although details will be described later, in the example of FIG. 24A, the demo screen display is executed when a predetermined time elapses after the symbol is stopped, in other words, when a predetermined time or more elapses after the game is stopped. Since it is a display screen (such as the “standby screen A” in FIG. 33 (a)), the situation in which the touch detection changes from “yes” to “no” is extremely limited. Therefore, by not executing the touch effect in the situation, the original significance of the touch effect, such as indicating that the game is in the starting state, is not lost at all.

Furthermore, in the "adjustment screen" in the "waiting for game" state, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, the touch effect using the "image" is not executed, but the "voice" is used. It is controlled to execute the touch effect using "" and the touch effect using a part of "lamp". In addition, if the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time (after the predetermined number of times), only the touch effect using the "image" can be used. However, it is controlled so that the touch effect using "voice" and "lamp" is not executed. In addition, during the display of the "adjustment screen" under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated, the "voice" that is normally performed even when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time. , And control not to execute all touch effects including touch effects using "lamps". On the other hand, in the "adjustment screen" in the "waiting for game" state, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", whether or not the change is the first time, and the change is under specific conditions. Control so that the touch effect is not performed regardless of the presence or absence.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the adjustment screen is being displayed, the touch effect is produced when the touch detection that occurs when the game is ended is changed from “yes” to “no” as in the case of the demo display. On the other hand, if the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", the touch effect of the "image", which is likely to hinder the adjustment work, is not performed, and the influence on the adjustment work is relatively small. The touch effect by "voice" and "lamp" is configured to be executed, and both the adjustment work and the touch effect can be appropriately executed. Also, unlike "demo display", even if multiple touch detections are performed, the multiple touch effects are not executed on the adjustment screen, so the sound related to the multiple (long time) touch effects during the adjustment work. The output and lamp output are not executed, and it is configured so as not to interfere with the most important adjustment work while the adjustment screen is displayed. Further, when the operation of the effect button is used for the adjustment work, when the adjustment work is started, the touch effect is not executed after that, which hinders the most important adjustment work during the adjustment screen display. Never.

Subsequently, in the "variable standby screen" in the "waiting for game" state, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, the touch effect using "voice" and the "lamp" are displayed. A touch effect using a part of the touch effect is executed, and the touch effect using the "image" is controlled to be executed under a predetermined condition (details will be described later, but in the case of a variable standby screen when shifting from the demo screen). In addition, after the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, the case where the change in the touch state is detected again (when the predetermined number of times or later) and the case where the effect button is operated are specified. While the "variable standby screen" under the conditions is being displayed, the touch effect using the "image" and "lamp" is not executed, and the "voice" effect is performed under certain conditions (for example, by lottery with a predetermined probability). Control to execute with (winning).

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" for the first time, the touch effect using the "image" is not executed, but under certain conditions (for example, winning a predetermined probability lottery). Control to execute a touch effect using (a part of) "voice" and "lamp". Also, when the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time (after the predetermined number of times), the touch detection is performed under certain conditions (for example, for the first time). It is controlled to execute the touch effect using (a part of) the "voice" and the "lamp" with the winning of the lottery with a lower probability than when it is performed. On the other hand, during the display of the "fluctuation standby screen" under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated, the touch effect using the "image" and "lamp" is not executed, and the "voice" effect is performed. , Control not to execute the touch effect.

In this way, while the "variable standby screen" is displayed, unlike the display of the "demo screen", even if the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", under certain conditions, a part of the "image" effect, etc. In the screen, it is easy to stay when the game is interrupted for a short time after the game is stopped, for example, when the player ignites a cigarette or drinks a drink. The effect of the touch effect is reduced as compared with the normal demo screen, so that the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable when the game is resumed. On the other hand, since the variable standby screen often shifts immediately after the end of the game, if the player interrupts the steering wheel operation, he / she does not encourage "enthusiasm" so much and says "I want you to continue the game". It is preferable to carry out the production. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the situation, by executing the effect of "voice" and "lamp" without performing the touch effect of "image", "does not promote the immersiveness" and "continue the game". We are performing a production that considers the balance of both things that we want to make. It should be noted that it is also possible to carry out the "image", and in that case, it is preferable to execute the effect display including the content that suppresses the "immersion".

Further, in the "initialization notification" in the "waiting for game" state, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" and when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no". In each case, regardless of the status of "number of changes, etc." (regardless of whether it is the "first time" or the second time or later), control is performed so that none of the "image", "audio", and "lamp" effects are executed. To do. In addition, regardless of whether or not the effect button or the like is in a state under specific conditions, it is controlled so that none of the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" is executed.

In this way, during the "initialization notification" in the "waiting for game" state, the touch effect is executed when the touch detection changes from "no" to "yes" or "yes" to "no". It is configured so that there is no such effect, and it is meaningless or extremely meaningless in the situation where the player does not normally operate the handle, which is the initialization notification (power-on notification in a broad sense) period after the power is turned on. By not executing the above, it is possible to reduce the power consumption at the time of initialization, suppress the noise of the amusement shop, and reduce the discomfort to the operator. Even in this state, for example, a minute effect processing such as a part of the "lamp" that can confirm the change in the touch detection state, in other words, the minimum effect within the range where the above effect can be obtained is executed. You may.

Further, in the "abnormality notification" in the "waiting for game" state, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, the touch effect is controlled so as not to be performed, and a predetermined number of times (for example, If it is determined that the touch detection has changed from "none" to "yes" for more than 10 times), then every predetermined number of times (for example, every two times thereafter), "image" and "sound" By using the "lamp", it is possible to understand that the touch detection is performed normally, and control is performed so as to execute a touch effect indicating that the notification is normal according to the specifications. On the other hand, if the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" during "abnormality notification" under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated, it does not matter the status of "number of changes, etc." It is controlled so that the touch effect is not performed (regardless of whether it is the first time or the second time or later).

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", is it under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated, regardless of the "change count, etc." situation? Regardless of whether or not, control is performed so that the touch effect is not executed.

In this way, during the "abnormality notification" in the "waiting for game" state, even if the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", the touch effect is not executed unless the operation is executed multiple times. It is configured in. Then, in a state where an abnormality has occurred, which is usually a situation in which the player does not operate the steering wheel or is unavoidably performing continuous games, there is a risk that the discomfort will be increased by meaningless or executing the game. I try not to perform a certain production. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the discomfort to the player at the time of abnormality. Even in this state, a minute (suppressed) effect for notifying that the steering wheel has been touched when confirming the abnormal state, an effect for confirming the abnormal state, and a complicated notification trigger are set. If so, an effect such as notifying the information, in other words, a minimum (minimum) effect within the range in which the above-mentioned effect can be obtained may be executed. It is also preferable to execute a special touch effect that apologizes for the occurrence of the abnormality when the touch effect is executed after the return screen after the abnormality notification.

In the case of an error abnormality (which can be referred to as an "unrecoverable error") that does not recover unless the power is turned on again in response to the above-mentioned recoverable error, in the present embodiment, the game is played. In order to make it easier to understand that it is an abnormality that cannot be done, it is controlled to stop (prohibit) the production process itself including the touch effect as a whole, but when priority is given to simplification of the process. Is also possible to execute the same processing as in the case of a non-recoverable error without prohibiting the touch effect even in the case of a recoverable error.
<<< The design is changing >>>

Examples of "during symbol change" in the above-mentioned "state of the gaming machine" include "when the symbol is stopped", "when reaching", "during specific production", and "abnormal display screen". Of these, "when the symbol is stopped" indicates, for example, when the effect symbol (190) is in the stopped state immediately before the start of fluctuation, from the shaking fluctuation (temporary stop) state immediately before the stop of fluctuation to the final stop. In addition, it seems that the situation is in a low speed state that is not classified as a state in which the symbol is changing, or that some of the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and only the remaining part is changing (during low speed fluctuation, etc.). It is also possible to include such a situation in "when the symbol is stopped".

The above-mentioned "at the time of reach" means the time of reaching production. As the "reach time", for example, a state in which a normal reach effect as illustrated in FIG. 37 (a) is performed, or an SP reach effect as illustrated in FIG. 37 (b) is performed. The state can be mentioned, and the final stage of the reach effect can be the timing when the reach effect is completed and the decorative symbol corresponding to the confirmed symbol (special symbol mode scheduled to be stopped) is temporarily stopped.

The above-mentioned "during specific effect" means a situation in which a predetermined specific effect is being executed. Although not shown, the term "during specific production" means that there is a high degree of expectation for the development of reach and a relatively high degree of expectation for hitting in a state where the design is changing without the reach effect being performed. In addition to during the execution of an effect that includes a notice indicating that, and during the execution of an effect that announces the hit of a normal symbol, the effect and button operation that are performed during the reach mentioned above to promote the operation of the effect button. Special effects that are performed in parallel with the reach effect, such as the effect performed by, cut-in effect, blackout effect (effect that makes the screen all black), etc. It is possible to exemplify the execution of a certain effect).

The above-mentioned "abnormality display screen" means that a predetermined image is displayed when a predetermined abnormality occurs. Although not shown, the "abnormal display screen" is a message for notifying the occurrence of an error such as a prize ball running out, a lower plate full, a door opening, or a movable accessory operation abnormality while continuing the symbol variation. It is possible to exemplify a display such as a door or a symbol.

Of these, in the case of "when the symbol is stopped", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, the "image" is provided on the condition that the other effects performed in the "when the symbol is stopped" are not affected. It is controlled so that the effect of "" and "voice" is performed, while the effect of "lamp" is not executed. Further, after the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" and the touch effect is executed, control is performed so that the touch effect is not executed even if the touch detection changes from "no" to "yes" again. Further, in the "when the symbol is stopped" under a specific condition such as after the effect button is operated, it is controlled so that none of the "image", "sound", and "lamp" effects is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", it is controlled so that the touch effect is not executed even if the change is the first time. The same conditions also apply to specific conditions such as when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" a predetermined number of times or more (for example, twice or more) or after the effect button is operated while waiting for the game. In the same manner as when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", the "image", "sound", and "lamp" effects are controlled not to be executed.

In this way, during "when the symbol is stopped" while the symbol is changing, the effect performed when the symbol is stopped is not hindered only when the touch detection that occurs when the game is restarted changes from "none" to "yes". It is configured to perform a degree of touch effect, for example, when the symbol is stopped when the reach is off, a voice display such as "Please do your best next time!" Or restart the game. The player's psychology when the game is restarted by executing the effect image that seems to be favorably received in a size or area that does not hinder the visibility of the display state of the symbol stop, or in such a timing. Can be expected to have the effect of improving. In addition, there is a player who repeatedly hits the operation unit regardless of whether or not the effect button is valid in order to expect re-variation when the symbol is stopped. For this reason, the touch effect is not executed under specific conditions such as when the effect button is operated while the symbol is stopped or when vibration is detected to the extent that the game is not stopped. Therefore, it can be expected to prevent the gaming machine from being subjected to unnecessary vibration when the symbol is stopped, and it is possible to prevent such a player from giving an unnecessary effect to give a negative psychology. When the symbol is stopped, a lamp display indicating the symbol stop is often displayed. Therefore, by avoiding a touch effect that overlaps with this display, the player can stop the symbol depending on the light emitting mode of the lamp. It is designed not to interfere with cognition.

In the above-mentioned "at the time of reach", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, no touch effect using "image", "sound", and "lamp" is executed. In addition, after the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, the case where the change in the touch state is detected again (when the predetermined number of times or later) and the case where the effect button is operated are specified. Even in the "reach time" under the condition, no touch effect using the "image", "sound", and "lamp" is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" for the first time, "Image", "Sound", and "Lamp" are produced on condition that other effects performed during reach are not affected. Is controlled so as to perform both. Furthermore, if the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" for the first time (after the predetermined number of times), "Image", "Voice", and "Lamp" are displayed. In the "reach time" under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated without executing any of the touch effects used, the "image" is provided on the condition that other effects performed during the reach are not affected. , "Voice", and "Lamp" are controlled to be executed.

In this way, in the "reach time", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", the touch effect is not executed, so that the "reach time" during the symbol change can be set. , In general, it is possible to perform an appropriate touch effect corresponding to a situation in which a player is firing (a situation in which touch detection is "Yes"). On the other hand, when a reach occurs, the result of the reach becomes the player's greatest concern, so it is conceivable that the player releases his hand from the steering wheel. Therefore, when the operation is performed, in response to the operation, an effect related to reliability is performed, or an effect indicating that it is not disadvantageous for the player to continue firing is performed. It can be expected to add a new game essence to the handle operation (touch) at the time of reach. Of course, the effect of improving the operation of the gaming machine can be expected simply by executing the effect that encourages the continuous firing, and it is configured to reflect the result of the reach and decide whether or not to execute the effect. By doing so, the playability can be further enhanced.

In the above-mentioned "during specific production", when the touch detection changes from "nothing" to "yes" for the first time, the touch detection changes from "nothing" to "yes" for the first time, as in the case of "at the time of reach". Later, in both cases where a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times) and when the effect button is operated and under specific conditions such as "during a specific effect". None of the touch effects using "image", "sound", and "lamp" are executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" for the first time, it does not affect other productions performed during "Specific production" as in the case of "Reach" described above. The conditions are controlled so that "image", "sound", and "lamp" are all produced. Furthermore, if the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" for the first time (after the predetermined number of times), "Image", "Voice", and "Lamp" are displayed. In the case of "during specific effect" under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated without executing any of the touch effects used, there is no effect on other effects performed during "during specific effect". The condition is controlled so that any of the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" is executed.

In this way, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" during "specific effect" as well as "at the time of reach", the touch effect is not executed. During the fluctuating "specific effect", it is generally possible to perform an appropriate touch effect corresponding to the situation where the player is firing (the situation where the touch detection is "yes"). On the other hand, during "specific production", the result of the symbol change is the player's greatest concern, so it is conceivable that the player releases his hand from the steering wheel. For this reason, when the operation is performed, it is disadvantageous to respond to the operation (correspond to the change in touch detection), for example, to perform an effect related to reliability, or for the player to continue firing. It can be expected that a new game essence will be added to the handle operation (touch) at the time of a specific effect by configuring the effect to indicate that the effect does not occur. Of course, the effect of improving the operation of the gaming machine can be expected simply by executing the effect that encourages the continuous firing, and the result of the fluctuation is reflected to determine whether or not the effect can be executed. By configuring it, the playability can be further enhanced.

Further, in the above-mentioned "abnormal display screen", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, the touch detection changes from "no" to "yes", and then the touch detection changes to "no" again. When it changes from "" to "Yes", it is controlled to perform "Voice" effect on condition that it does not affect other effects performed at "Abnormal display screen", while "Image" and "Lamp" The production of "" is controlled so as not to be executed. Further, in the "when the symbol is stopped" under a specific condition such as after the effect button is operated, it is controlled so that none of the "image", "sound", and "lamp" effects is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" for the first time, the "Voice" effect is performed on the condition that the other effects performed on the "Abnormal display screen" are not affected. On the other hand, it is controlled not to execute the touch effect of "image" and "lamp". Further, when the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" and then the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" a predetermined number of times or more (for example, twice or more), and the effect button is operated. In the case of an "abnormal display screen" under specific conditions such as after the button is displayed, it is controlled so that the touch effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" are not executed.

In this way, during the "abnormality display screen", if the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", there is no situation in which the player is disadvantaged if the firing is stopped during the abnormality. Occasionally, it is possible to prevent the game from being carelessly continued in the abnormal state by configuring the touch effect to notify that the handle is not operated because it is abnormal. Further, in this embodiment, the touch effect is executed only for the voice output in consideration of the priority of the abnormality notification and the touch effect. In addition, in the case where the player is disadvantaged when the firing is stopped during the abnormality, when the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No", the notification that the firing is maintained is notified. By configuring to execute a touch effect by "voice", if the stop of firing is in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, the effect prevents the game from being stopped carelessly. be able to.
<<< Hitting >>>

Examples of the "hit" in the above-mentioned "state of the gaming machine" include "during the start demo", "during the round", "between the rounds", "during the specific production", and "during the end demo". .. Of these, "at the time of the start demo" means a situation in which the start demo of the jackpot game is being executed, and "during the round" is a unit game in which the jackpot of the jackpot device 90 is opened in the jackpot game. Means that it is a situation where

In addition, "between rounds" means a situation between "during a round" and the next "during a round", and "during a specific production" is a specific predetermined "during a hit". It means the situation where the production is being executed. Further, "at the time of the end demo" means a situation in which the end demo of the jackpot game is being executed.

Of these, in the "start demo", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, "voice" is provided on the condition that other effects performed in the "start demo" are not affected. Is controlled so as to perform the effect of "", while the effect of "image" and "lamp" is controlled not to be executed. In addition, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" and then the touch detection changes from "no" to "yes" again, or after the effect button is operated, "start" under specific conditions. In the case of "demo", it is controlled so that none of the "image", "audio", and "lamp" effects is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" for the first time, and the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", then the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" again. When the change occurs more than once (for example, twice or more), the touch effect of "image", "sound", and "lamp" is controlled so as not to be executed. Furthermore, in the case of "start demo" under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated, the touch effect of "image" is not executed, and the touch effect of "voice" and "lamp" is performed under the predetermined conditions. Control to do.

In this way, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" during the "start demo", for example, depending on the content of the change that resulted in the big hit, the number of symbol changes up to the big hit, and the like. , "Congratulations!" And other "voice" blessing of the big hit can be executed, so that the effect of associating the game process with the resumption of launch can be executed. Also, if the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" when the start timing of the jackpot game with substance is approaching, such as at the end of the "Start Demo", "Launch". It is configured to suggest that it will soon switch to the "game state that is disadvantageous if it is not done", or to perform a touch effect by "voice" or "ramp" that suggests the launch position such as "Please hit right!" By doing so, when the hand is released from the firing handle at an inappropriate timing, it is possible to notify that the firing operation is executed as a touch effect as needed.

In the above-mentioned "during round", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, no touch effect using "image", "sound", and "lamp" is executed. In addition, after the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, the case where the change in the touch state is detected again (when the predetermined number of times or later) and the case where the effect button is operated are specified. Even in the "during the round" under the condition, no touch effect using the "image", "sound", and "lamp" is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" for the first time, and when the touch state changes again after the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" for the first time. (In the case of the predetermined number of times or later), none of the touch effects using the "image", "sound", and "lamp" is executed. Furthermore, during the "round" under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated, "image", "audio", and "lamp" are provided on the condition that other effects performed during the "round" are not affected. It is controlled so that all of the effects of are performed.

In this way, "during the round" is a game that is "disadvantageous if it is not fired" only when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" under specific conditions, for example, immediately after the start of the round. Inappropriate by configuring to perform touch effects with "voice" or "lamp" that suggest a "state" or a launch position such as "please hit right!" When the hand is released from the launch handle at the timing, it is possible to notify that the launch operation is executed as a touch effect as needed.

In the above-mentioned "between rounds", as in the case of the above-mentioned "during the start demo", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, it affects other effects performed during the "between rounds". It is controlled so that the "sound" effect is performed on the condition that there is no "image" and the "lamp" effect is not performed. In addition, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" and then the touch detection changes from "no" to "yes" again, or after the effect button is operated, "round" under specific conditions. In the case of "pause", control is performed so that none of the "image", "sound", and "lamp" effects is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" for the first time, and the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", then the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" again. When the number of changes is more than the number of times (for example, two or more times), the touch effect of the "image", the "sound", and the "lamp" is controlled not to be executed as in the above-mentioned "start demonstration". Furthermore, in the case of "between rounds" under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated, the touch effect of "image" is not executed, but the touch effect of "voice" and "lamp" is controlled. To do.

In this way, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing immediately before the start of the next round) "between rounds", the touch effect by "voice" is executed. For example, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" at that timing, a blessing effect such as "nice!" Is executed by "voice". On the other hand, "voice" when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" at a specific timing in a specific "between rounds" (for example, between rounds in which the time until the start of the next round is longer than usual). It is configured to execute a touch effect by "ramp". For example, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" at an early timing when the round is long, "nice!" By "voice". A blessing production like this is performed. In this way, to provide an opportunity to improve the skill of the player by executing the effect related to the game (according to the skill) according to the situation such as the period between rounds and the change state of the touch detection. Can be done.

In the above-mentioned "during specific production", as in the case of "between rounds" described above, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, it is used for other productions performed during "specific production". It is controlled so that the "sound" effect is performed on the condition that there is no influence, while the "image" and "lamp" effects are not executed. In addition, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" and then the touch detection changes from "no" to "yes" again, or after the effect button is operated, "specification" under specific conditions such as In the case of "during production", control is performed so that none of the "image", "sound", and "lamp" effects is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" for the first time, and when the touch state changes again after the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" for the first time. (In the case of the predetermined number of times or later), as in the case of the above-mentioned "during the round", none of the touch effects using the "image", "sound", and "lamp" is executed. Furthermore, during "specific effect" under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated, there is no effect on other effects performed during "specific effect" (for example, touch detection during the specific effect period). (Being within the reception period), or on the condition that the production execution lottery is won, control is performed so that the production of "image", "audio", and "lamp" is performed.

In this way, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" at a predetermined timing of "during a specific effect" (for example, the timing after the result notification in the promotion effect or the consecutive villa notification effect), "voice" is used. It is configured to execute a touch effect. For example, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" at that timing, "lucky!" Or "sorry!" The production like this is executed. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" at a predetermined timing of "During a specific effect" (for example, the timing of waiting for input in a promotion effect or a continuous villa notification effect), the "effect button" is pressed. It is configured to notify the result of a specific effect by "effect", "voice", and "lamp" as if it was operated. For example, during the promotion effect, "press the button!" Is displayed. When the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", the effect corresponding to the result of the specific effect is executed. In this way, by executing the touch effect according to the result of the specific effect or by using the effect execution trigger as a substitute for other inputs during the specific effect, it is preferable to change the touch operation during the specific effect in the hit game. Can be utilized in.

In the above-mentioned "during the end demo", as in the case of the above-mentioned "during the specific effect", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" for the first time, another effect performed at the "end demo" is performed. It is controlled so that the "sound" effect is performed on the condition that there is no influence on the "image" and the "lamp" effect. In addition, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" and then the touch detection changes from "no" to "yes" again, or after the effect button is operated, "end" under specific conditions. In the case of "demo", it is controlled so that none of the "image", "audio", and "lamp" effects is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" for the first time, and when the touch state changes again after the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" for the first time. (In the case of the predetermined number of times or later), as in the case of the above-mentioned "during the round", none of the touch effects using the "image", "sound", and "lamp" is executed. Furthermore, "at the time of the end demo" under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed, "image", "audio", and "audio" "at the time of the end demo" on the condition that other effects performed at the "end demo" are not affected. Control so that all of the "ramp" effects are performed.

In this way, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" at a predetermined timing of "during the end demo" (for example, the timing immediately before the end of the end demo), the touch effect by "voice" is executed. For example, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" at that timing, an effect such as "Do your best next time!" Is executed according to the notification result by "voice". Demonstration. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" at a predetermined timing of "during the end demo" (for example, the timing immediately after the start of the end demo), "directing", "voice", and "lamp" are used. It is configured to execute the touch effect, for example, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" at that timing, this big hit like "I got a lot of balls this time too!" The effect related to is executed by "image", "sound", and "lamp". In this way, by executing the touch effect according to the timing during the end demo, the hit game and the change in the touch operation during the end demo can be suitably linked.
<<< During probability change (electric support) >>>

Among the above-mentioned "states of gaming machines", "during probabilistic change (electric support)" includes "when the symbol is stopped", "when reaching", "during specific production", and "abnormal display screen". These situations can have the same meaning as each situation assumed in the above-mentioned "design changing" state. Then, in the example of FIG. 24B, the "number of changes, etc." is "first time" when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" and from "yes" to "no". In any of the situations of "after the predetermined time" and "specific conditions", the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" are each in the state of "design changing" shown in FIG. 24 (a). It is defined in the same way as the production (with the same content).

In addition, in order not to make the explanation complicated, the state of the gaming machine is defined for "probability change (electric support)" in the same way as the above-mentioned "design change" related to normal time (non-electric support). However, as a difference between "during probabilistic change (electric support)" (the description is omitted in FIG. 24) and "during symbol change" related to normal times, "waiting for a game" from the "stopped" state. It can be mentioned that it does not shift to the "medium" state. Further, the game state is not limited to this, and it is possible to determine a game state different from the "during symbol change" related to the normal time, depending on factors such as the content of the effect to be performed and the difference in the control mode.

<< Production type >>
As described above, the state of the gaming machine, the method of changing the touch detection, the state of execution of the production by the "image", "sound", and "lamp" according to the number of changes, etc. have been described. Based on this, although the concept of "performing a production" is common, in terms of "what kind of production is to be performed", it is possible to adopt various modes such as those explained so far and those not explained so far. It is possible. Therefore, in the following, a production type suitable as an effect to be executed in the above-mentioned situation will be described in more detail with some examples.

25 and 26 are a list of more specific types of effects when a change in the touch state is detected in various gaming states.

FIG. 25 shows “type of effect to be executed when the detection state changes”, “setting change relationship”, “waiting for game”, and “during symbol change” from the left side of the chart. Further, FIG. 26 shows “type of effect to be executed when the detection state changes”, “hit”, and “probability change (electric support)” from the left of the chart. “Setting change relationship”, “waiting for game”, “during symbol change”, “during hitting”, and “during probabilistic change (electric support)” in FIGS. 25 and 26 indicate the state of the gaming machine, which has been described above. It means the same classification as shown as "state of the gaming machine" in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b).

Of the items shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the "type of effect to be executed when the detection state changes" changes from "none" to "yes" for touch detection and from "yes" to "no". This is a list of the types of effects that can be performed in such cases. Then, as shown in FIG. 25, the types of effects belonging to the "type of effect to be executed when the detection state changes" include "shift to another mode (effect)", "effect related to the character", and "game". "Promoting production", "Retaining the end of the game", "RTC-related production", "Depressing prevention-related production", "Card forgetting prevention-related production", "Game explanation production", "Game result" "Notification effect" and "touch notification" can be mentioned.

These types of effects are examples of various effects that are comprehensively classified based on their functions and attributes. The type of production is not limited to the classifications listed here, and other classifications can be adopted. In addition, types other than those listed here can be provided. Further, each type is not always considered to be clearly separated, and for example, it is conceivable that a certain effect can be classified into a plurality of types in a duplicated manner.

Among the various types described above, "shift to another mode (effect)" can also be referred to as, for example, "effect of another mode". Then, in "shift to another mode (effect)", when the touch detection state changes from "none" to "yes" (or "yes" to "no"), the effect mode changes to a different effect mode. Means something. Further, the "directing mode" is a (directing) format / form that depends on determining the production display content such as a preview production or a reach production, and these production formats (directing modes) are controlled. It can be said that it is specified by the difference in the data code. Then, as an example of the type of the effect mode, stages A to Z at the time of normal operation, stages a to g at the time of probability change (electric support), and the like can be mentioned.

In the above-mentioned "character-related effect", when the touch detection state changes from "no" to "yes" (or "yes" to "no"), the effect using the character is started or the character is used. It means something that changes the content of the production that was being done. In addition, the above-mentioned "effect that promotes the game" is such that the story in the production is advanced, the content of the production is developed, or the button production is executed according to the state change of the touch detection. Means. Here, as described above, it is also possible to classify the effects using characters into both "character-related effects" and "game-promoting effects".

Further, as a specific example of the "character-related effect", an element of the effect related to the motif of the effect appears or changes based on the touch detection. More specifically, for example, "Mars", "Meteorite", "Spaceship", etc. when the gaming machine has a space motif, and "Battery" or "Doctor" when a robot is used as a motif. Alternatively, it is possible to consider things such as "weapons" and "armor" in the battle production appearing in the story based on touch detection, or existing production elements being changed to these elements.

The above-mentioned "effect of detaining the end of the game" means that the player can be expected to work to discourage the player from ending the game and leaving the game machine based on the change of state of touch detection. doing. For example, an effect executed using the above-mentioned limited frequency pattern table (limited frequency pattern effect) can be considered to be included in this "effect of retaining the end of the game". Furthermore, a production that develops halfway through a series of stories can be included in this "production that keeps the end of the game".

As this "directing to keep the end of the game", display of messages for the purpose of holding such as "Please keep in touch with me a little more!", "Don't stop!", "I don't know even if you are dug up". Etc. can be exemplified. Further, when the limited frequency pattern table is used as described above, a predetermined limited frequency pattern table is selected with the touch detection as an opportunity, and a peculiar and unusual effect is frequently displayed in the subsequent several games. Alternatively, it is conceivable to make it easier for an effect that normally appears infrequently to appear.

The above-mentioned "RTC-related production" means something that is performed based on real time using an RTC (real-time clock). For example, an effect performed as the above-mentioned "E121: RTC" can be considered to correspond to this "RTC-related effect". In addition, the production using the RTC, for example, the production performed by deciding the due date and the season, the production performed by deciding the time zone of the day, the production performed by a plurality of pachinko gaming machines at the same time, and the like are also performed. It can be exemplified as "RTC-related production".

The above-mentioned "directing related to prevention of immersiveness" means something that prevents the player from excessively concentrating on the game. For example, you can think of something that produces "images" or "voices" with messages such as "Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately" or "Be careful about getting into it."

The above-mentioned "directing related to prevention of forgetting to take out cards" means that the player does not forget to take out various cards from the above-mentioned card unit. For example, you can think of something that produces an "image" or "sound" with a message such as "Be careful not to forget to take the card" or "Don't forget to take the card".

The above-mentioned "production of a game explanation or the like" means an explanation of the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 10 and an explanation of environment settings such as volume. For example, it is possible to consider the type and expectation level (big hit probability) of the jackpot, the type of the effect mode, the introduction of the characters that appear, and the display of the environment setting menu as the effect of the "image".

The above-mentioned "notification effect on the game result" means the notification effect of the game result such as the hit / fail judgment and the type of big hit. For example, it is possible to exemplify the notification effect of the result related to the change at that time (the change). Then, in this case, as will be described later, it is conceivable not to perform the "notification effect on the game result" during the "game waiting" in FIG. 25. In addition, as a "notification effect on the game result", the transition of the ball output and the number of big hits of the pachinko gaming machine 10 on that day, the number of big hits during the probability change and the electric support, the number of acquired balls, etc. are used as the effect of the "image". It is also possible to display.

The above-mentioned "touch notification" means that notification that a touch operation has been performed is performed. Here, as the "touch notification", in a broad sense, it is possible to consider including the types of effects described so far, such as when a touch detection is performed, a predetermined effect is started, and the effect is changed. However, the "touch notification" shown in FIG. 25 means that a touch operation (touch detection) has been performed, and the "touch notification" includes, for example, "touch notification" together with an image of the handle. It is possible to exemplify such things as performing character display or voice display such as "there was a touch operation", or lighting a predetermined lamp (LED).

As an effect other than the "touch notification", an effect that is executed regardless of the presence or absence of touch detection can be mentioned. Then, as an effect other than the "touch notification", for example, a notice during a symbol change, an effect during a big hit, an effect used during a demonstration, and the like can be mentioned.

In the example of FIG. 25, the types of "dedicated" and "shared" are further provided for each of the "character-related effects" to the "touch notification" described so far. Of these, "dedicated" is provided as a dedicated one for each of "character-related effects" to "touch notification", and as effects other than "character-related effects" to "touch notification" based on touch detection. Means an unused production. Further, "shared" means an effect that is also used as an effect other than "touch notification" from "effects related to characters" based on touch detection.
<<< Setting change relationship >>

Among the states of the various gaming machines shown in FIG. 25, the above-mentioned "setting change relationship" defines the states of "setting being changed" and "setting being displayed" as in the example of FIG. 24 (a). There is. Here, the situations represented by “setting is being changed” and “setting is being displayed” are the same as in the example of FIG. 24 (a). Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the symbols “○”, “Δ”, and “×” are used, and the meanings of these symbols are the same as in the example of FIG. 24 (a). "Is preferable to execute", "Δ" indicates "preferable or possible to execute under certain conditions", and "x" indicates "unfavorable or difficult to execute".

Of these, "Δ" indicates the effectiveness conditionally, but it is possible to adopt a control mode that executes any of the effects. Further, "x" is a control mode in which execution is unfavorable or difficult, but it is intentionally executed. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the symbol “−” is used, and the symbol “−” indicates that the effect is not assigned here.

Then, in the state of "setting change relation" shown in FIG. 25, since "setting is being changed" and "setting is being displayed", the touch detection shown at the left end in the figure is changed from "none" to "yes". Regarding the case, it is said that "shift to another mode (effect)" is not executed (x). Further, the "character-related effect" to the "notification effect related to the game result" are "-" as described above for both "dedicated" and "shared".

The "dedicated" effect related to the above-mentioned "touch notification" is considered to be suitable or possible (△) to be executed under certain conditions in both cases of “setting is being changed” and “setting is being displayed”. The "shared" effect is considered to be unfavorable or difficult to execute (x) in either case of "setting is being changed" or "setting is being displayed".

Regarding the state of this "setting change relationship", even when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", the above-mentioned touch detection changes from "no" to "touch notification" from "character-related effect". As in the case of "Yes", the arrangement regarding the type of production is made.

Further, as shown by "Δ" in the "setting change relationship" in the "game machine state" of FIG. 24 (a), only the effect by the "lamp" can be executed in the "setting change relationship" state. There is sex. Then, in FIG. 25, “Δ” indicates that the “touch notification” effect executed in the “setting change relationship” state is a dedicated effect for notifying the touch detection using the lamp. .. On the other hand, since it is an effect using a lamp, various effects such as "effect related to the character", "effect to promote the game", or "effect to hold the end of the game" cannot be executed. A "-" that is not subject to the provisions here is shown.

Then, in accordance with these agreements, the items of "△" (here, the production of "touch notification" of "dedicated") should not interfere with the display in the "setting changing" or "setting display" state. It is possible to perform the effect in a suppressed manner. In addition, the item of "x" (here, "touch notification" of "shared") is not executed. Here, as the effect of "touch notification" of "dedicated", it can be exemplified that the characters "setting is being changed" and "setting is being displayed" are displayed at the lower part of the screen.
<<< Waiting for a game >>>

Subsequently, examples of the above-mentioned "waiting for game" state include "demo screen", "adjustment screen", "variable standby screen", "initialization notification", and "abnormality notification". These states are similar to those described in the example of FIG. 24 (a). In the "demo screen" (displaying) in this "waiting for game", it is preferable to execute "shift to another mode (effect)" when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes". It is said to be a thing (○). Further, the "character-related effect" and the "game-promoting effect" are preferably executed for both "dedicated" and "shared" (○).

In addition, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", it is not preferable or difficult to execute the "effect of holding the end of the game" for both "dedicated" and "shared" (x). It is said that. Furthermore, it is said that "RTC-related production" and "immersion prevention-related production" should be executed for both "dedicated" and "shared" (○), and "card removal prevention-related". It is said that "the production of" is suitable or possible (Δ) to be executed under certain conditions for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Of these, "△" is used for "directing the prevention of forgetting to take the card" based on the following idea. That is, since it is desirable that the "directing related to the prevention of forgetting to remove the card" is performed when there is a high possibility of leaving the seat, such as at the end of the game, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", It is considered that the effect of the production is small. On the other hand, for example, under specific conditions such as when the touch detection is changed from "Yes" to "No" and the touch effect is allowed to be executed but has not passed for a certain period of time or more (in the case of leaving the seat for a short time). As far as the limit is concerned, it is considered that performing related effects such as "Did you forget to take the card?" When the game starts has a certain effect. You may. Therefore, it is preferable or possible (Δ) to execute the “effect related to the prevention of forgetting to remove the card” under certain conditions.

In addition, the "production of game explanations, etc." is marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "notification production regarding game results" is "dedicated" because the corresponding notification is not performed. , "Shared" is said to be "-" without any particular agreement. Further, the "touch notification" is marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

In addition, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no" in the "demo screen", "shift to another mode (directing)" is set to "x". In addition, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), the corresponding notification is not performed, so both "dedicated" and "shared" are agreed. It is set as "-" which is not the target of.

Next, in the "adjustment screen" (displayed) in "waiting for game", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", "shift to another mode (directing)" to "game". "Direction that promotes" is said to be "△". Furthermore, the "directing that keeps the end of the game" is marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "RTC-related directing" is "dedicated" and "shared" for both. It is said to be "△".

Here, the reason why the "RTC-related effect" is set to "Δ" which means conditional and the "touch notification" is set to "○" which means that the execution is preferable is as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 24A, for the "adjustment screen" of "waiting for game", the effect of "image" is not executed, and the effect of "sound" (conditionally, the effect of "lamp" is performed. (Combined use) is to be executed. In this way, regarding the "adjustment screen" of "waiting for a game", the production is limited to "lamps" and "voices" other than "images", so "touch notification" is prioritized and "RTC-related" The priority of "directing" is lower than that of "touch notification".

In addition, "production related to prevention of immersiveness" to "production of game explanations" are marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "notification production related to game results" is applicable. Since no notification is given, both "dedicated" and "shared" are marked as "-". Further, the "touch notification" is marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Further, as for the "adjustment screen", when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", "shift to another mode (effect)" is set to "x". Furthermore, as for the other "character-related effects" to "touch notification", as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), the corresponding notification is not performed, so both "dedicated" and "shared" are "dedicated" and "shared". -". In this way, on the "adjustment screen" in "waiting for game", only when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", the effect of showing the touch notification to the extent that the adjustment work is not affected and the game promotion It is decided that the production related to the above will be performed in a limited manner.

Next, in the "variable standby screen" (displayed) in "waiting for game", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", "shift to another mode (effect)" is "x". It is said. Furthermore, "character-related effects" and "game-promoting effects" are marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "effects that hold the end of the game" are "dedicated". , "Shared" are all marked with "x".

In addition, "RTC-related production" and "immersion prevention-related production" are marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "card forgetting prevention-related production" is "directed". Both "dedicated" and "shared" are marked with "△". Furthermore, the "production of game explanations, etc." is marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "notification production regarding game results" is "not derived of game results". Both "dedicated" and "shared" are marked with "-". In addition, "touch notification" is marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Of these, the "production related to the prevention of forgetting to remove the card" is suitable or possible to be executed under certain conditions (△), which is the production related to the prevention of forgetting to remove the card related to the above-mentioned "demo screen". This is the same as the case of "", and the situation where the effect of performing the production is considered to be large is a limited case such as leaving the seat for a short time.

Next, as for the "fluctuation standby screen" of "variation standby", when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", "shift to another mode (effect)" is set to "△". There is. Furthermore, the "effects related to the character" to the "effects that keep the end of the game" are marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Here, regarding the case where the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", the "shift to another mode (effect)" is set to "△", for example, the player fires while waiting for fluctuation. If you take your hand off the handle (20) and try to leave your seat, you cannot expect to enhance the taste of the game even if you switch to another production mode. This is because it may be possible to have the intention to return to the seat. It is also possible to perform control such as returning to the default production mode (for example, the initial setting mode when the power is turned on or the production mode when the player is not selected for the environment setting) when leaving the seat. Is.

In addition, the "RTC-related production" is marked as "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "immersion prevention-related production" is for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is said to be "x". Furthermore, the "directing related to preventing forgetting to remove the card" is marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "directing for game explanations" is either "dedicated" or "shared". Is also marked as "x".

Here, the reason why "RTC-related production" is set to "△" in "dedicated" and "shared" is that the pros and cons of touch production differ depending on what kind of production is adopted as RTC extension. This is because it is considered that there are cases.

In addition, as for the "notification effect regarding the game result", as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), the corresponding notification is not performed on the "variable standby screen", so that both "dedicated" and "shared" can be used. It is set to "-", and "touch notification" is set to "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Subsequently, in the "initialization notification" (middle) in "waiting for game", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no". In either case, "shift to another mode (directing)" is marked with "x". Further, as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), the touch effect is not performed. This is because there is a high possibility that the player does not exist during the initialization notification immediately after the power is turned on, and there is no point in executing the effect due to the change in touch detection.

Next, in the "abnormality notification" (displayed) in the "waiting for game", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", "shift to another mode (directing)" is "x". It is said. Further, the "production related to the character" to the "production such as game explanation" are marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared". On the other hand, the "notification effect regarding the game result" and the "touch notification" are set to "Δ" to be executed under specific conditions for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Further, in the "abnormality notification" (during display), when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", "shift to another mode (effect)" is set to "x". Further, as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), the touch effect is not performed. In this way, in the "abnormality notification" (displayed) in the "game standby", the touch notification is shown to the extent that the adjustment work is not affected only when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes". It is decided that the production and the notification production regarding the game result will be executed in a limited manner.
<<< The design is changing >>>

Subsequently, as the above-mentioned "design changing" state, "when the symbol is stopped", "when reaching", "during specific production", and "abnormal display screen" can be mentioned. These states are similar to those described in the example of FIG. 24 (a). In the "when the symbol is stopped" in this "during symbol change", the "shift to another mode (effect)" is set to "x" when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes". Further, the "character-related effect" is set to "Δ" for "dedicated" and "x" for "shared".

In this way, regarding the "character-related effect", the reason why the "shared" effect is set to "x" is whether the effect is due to touch detection or the effect related to symbol variation when the shared effect is executed when the symbol is stopped. This is because it becomes impossible and the effect of the touch effect is diminished. Such a situation also applies to "at the time of reach", "during specific production", and "abnormal display screen" described below. For this reason, it is desirable to adopt a control mode in which the "character-related effect" in "during symbol change" is executed only under special conditions in many cases (for example, during hit symbol change). it is conceivable that.

In addition, the "production that promotes the game" is "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "production that keeps the end of the game" to the "production related to preventing forgetting to take the card" is " Both "dedicated" and "shared" are marked with "x". Further, in the "production of game explanation, etc.", "△" is set for "dedicated" and "x" is set for "shared". In addition, the "notification effect on game results" is marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "touch notification" is marked with "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is said that.

More specifically, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", it is considered that the player has the intention to start (restart) the game in principle, so the game should be continued. While urging effects are preferable, "effects that hold the end of the game" and "effects related to preventing forgetting to remove the card" related to the end of the game are not suitable as effects in the "when the symbol is stopped" state. It can be said that. For this reason, as described above, the "production that promotes the game" is set to "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "production that keeps the end of the game" to the "production related to preventing forgetting to remove the card" Both "dedicated" and "shared" are marked with "x".

And, as the "directing that promotes the game" here, displaying characters and items to fuel the expectation that the story in the directing will advance, and displaying the characters "development?" Can be exemplified.

Subsequently, in "when the symbol is stopped" in "during symbol change", "shift to another mode (effect)" is set to "x" when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no". There is. Further, the "character-related effect" is set to "Δ" for "dedicated" and "x" for "shared".

In addition, the "directing that promotes the game" is marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "directing that keeps the end of the game" is for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is said to be "○". Furthermore, "RTC-related production" is marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "production related to prevention of immersiveness" to "production such as game explanation" is "dedicated". , "Shared" are all marked with "△".

In addition, the "notification effect on game results" is marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "touch notification" is marked with "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is said that.
In this way, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" in "when the symbol is stopped" in "during symbol change", the effect of showing touch notification and the game are promoted under certain conditions. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", the effect of holding the end of the game is mainly executed. From this, it can be said that the influence on the player who uses the symbol stop as the criterion for the end of the game can be expected.

In addition, in "during reach" and "during specific effect" in "during symbol change", "shift to another mode (effect)" is "shifted to another mode (effect)" when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes". It is said to be "x". In addition, among the "notification effects related to game results", "shared" is indicated by "Δ", and other effects are indicated by "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Further, regarding the case where the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", "shift to another mode (effect)" is set to "x". In addition, the "character-related effect" is set to "Δ" for "dedicated" and "x" for "shared". In addition, "directed to promote the game" to "directed to explain the game" are marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Further, the "notification effect on the game result" is "△" for "dedicated" and "x" for "shared". In addition, "touch notification" is marked with "x" for "dedicated" and "△" for "shared".

In this way, in "during reach" and "during specific production" in "during symbol change", certain conditions are met when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" or "yes" to "no". Under this, it is possible to execute a notification effect related to the game result dedicated to the touch effect, and due to the change in touch detection, in addition to the effect during the symbol change, a notification effect related to the game result that is not easily confused with the effect when the symbol changes is added. can do.

Further, in the "abnormal display screen" (during display) in "during symbol change", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", or when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no". In any case, "shift to another mode (directing)" is marked as "x". In addition, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", the "dedicated" and "shared" effects of the touch notification may be executed under certain conditions, but as described above (if necessary). (See FIG. 24) As for other effects, since the corresponding notification is not performed, both “dedicated” and “shared” are marked with “-”.

In this way, in the "abnormal display screen" (during display) in "during symbol change", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", only touch notification is performed under certain conditions. Can be performed, but other effects are not performed. As a result, it can be said that when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lost without carelessly producing a game promotion or the like.
<<< Hitting >>>

Subsequently, as the above-mentioned "hit" state, "during the start demo", "during the round", "between the rounds", "during the specific production", and "during the end demo" can be mentioned. These states are similar to those described in the example of FIG. 24 (b). In the "start demo" (during the start demo is displayed) in this "hit", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", or when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no". In any case, "shift to another mode (directing)" is marked with "x". Further, the "character-related effect" and the "game-promoting effect" are marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

In addition, the "directing that keeps the end of the game" is marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "RTC-related directing" is "dedicated" and "shared" for both. It is said to be "△". Furthermore, the "directing related to prevention of immersiveness" is marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "directing related to preventing forgetting to remove the card" is "dedicated" and "shared". All of them are marked with "△".

Furthermore, "production of game explanations" and "notification production related to game results" are marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "touch notification" is "dedicated" and "shared". All of them are marked with "△".

In this way, during the "start demo" (during the start demo display) in the "hit", it is not confused with the production when the symbol changes, so the game can be promoted regardless of whether it is shared or dedicated. By executing the effects related to the character, the effect of making the blissful time for the player, which is a big hit, more exciting can be expected. In addition, in such a situation, in relation to the end of the game that the player may not select, it is possible to prevent the player from pouring water into the interest of the player by performing an effect that keeps the end of the game. It can be said that it is possible.

Furthermore, in "during a round" in "hit", "others" regardless of whether the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" or the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no". "Transition to mode (directing)" is set to "x". In addition, "productions related to characters" to "productions such as game explanations" are marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared". On the other hand, "notification effect regarding game result" and "touch notification" are set to "Δ" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

In this way, during the "round" in the "hit", the fire is continuously fired (the state where the touch detection is "yes" is maintained), so that the minimum necessary touch detection notification and the round are performed. On the notification effect screen, it is possible to execute an effect limited to alternative functions such as when a hand that does not hold the handle cannot be used, and a range that does not hinder the firing performed during the hit, which is the essence of the game. It can be said that the production setting at the time of touch is realized by limiting the production to.

Furthermore, in the "between rounds" in "hit", each production type corresponds to the case where the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes" and the case where the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no". The mode of execution of is defined in the same manner as in the above-mentioned "during the round" (with the same contents).

In addition, as "during specific production" in "hit", "when the touch detection changes from" none "to" yes "and when the touch detection changes from" yes "to" no "," "Transition to another mode (directing)" is marked with "x". In addition, "productions related to characters" to "productions such as game explanations" are marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared". Furthermore, the "notification effect on game results" is marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "touch notification" is marked with "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is said that.

In this way, in the "specific production" in the "hit", the fire is continuously fired (the state where the touch detection is "yes" is maintained) as in the "round", etc., so that it is mainly , On the notification effect screen, it is possible to execute an effect limited to alternative functions such as when a hand that does not hold the handle cannot be used, and it does not interfere with the firing that is performed during the hit, which is the essence of the game. It can be said that it is possible to realize an appropriate production setting at the time of touch by limiting the production to a range.

Furthermore, in the "end demo" (during the end demo is being displayed) in the "hit", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", "shift to another mode (directing)" is "shifted to another mode (directing)". It is said to be "x". In addition, "character-related effects" to "RTC-related effects" are marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "depression-related effects" and "forgot to remove the card". "Prevention-related production" is marked with "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Furthermore, the "production of game explanations, etc." is marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "notification production regarding game results" is for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is said to be "○". In addition, "touch notification" is set to "Δ" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Further, regarding the case where the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", "shift to another mode (effect)" is set to "x". In addition, "character-related production" to "RTC-related production" are marked with "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "immersion prevention-related production" is "dedicated". , "Shared" are all marked with "△".

Furthermore, the "directing related to preventing forgetting to remove the card" is marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "directing for game explanations" is either "dedicated" or "shared". Is also marked as "△". In addition, the "notification effect on game results" is marked with "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "touch notification" is marked with "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is said that.

In this way, at the time of the "end demo" (during the end demo is being displayed) in the "hit", the touch detection is "none" in consideration of the possibility of leaving the seat or stopping the game at the end of the big hit. It can be said that it is preferable to execute a game result (for example, information on the game state after the end of the big hit) or an effect to prevent forgetting to remove the card. In addition, when the game content after the big hit is complicated, when the touch detection becomes "none", it is possible to provide an opportunity to grasp the game content by displaying an explanation about the subsequent game content. It can be said that it is suitable.
<<< During probability change (electric support) >>>

Subsequently, as the above-mentioned "probability change (electric support)" state, "when the symbol is stopped", "when reaching", "during specific production", and "abnormal display screen" can be mentioned. These states are similar to those described in the example of FIG. 24 (b). Then, with respect to the case where the touch detection is changed from "no" to "yes" and the case where the touch detection is changed from "yes" to "no", the execution mode of each effect type is the above-mentioned "design variation". It is defined in the same way (with the same content) as "Medium" (Fig. 25).

Here, the following can be said about the specific game state such as during the probability change or during the electric support. For example, it is considered desirable not to shift to the demo state (here, the normal demo state in which the standby screen A is displayed) during the probability change or the electric support. In this way, the transition to the game standby state (normal demo state) can be premised on a low probability and low base state (non-probability and non-electric support state), and the touch effect can be produced. It is easy to specialize in the production from the viewpoint of "starting the game". That is, it is possible to produce the touch effect as emphasizing the content indicating "start of the game" from a state with a low probability and a low base.

Further, it can be said that it is preferable not to execute the firing detection effect (touch effect) in the non-variable state during the probability change or the electric support (which can be said to be the standby state in the specific game state). However, volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible. In the examples described so far, the adjustment screen (FIG. 33 (c)) is displayed by operating the effect buttons (operation buttons 22 and the like) during the demo screen (here, during the normal demo state in which the standby screen A is displayed). After the transition, the volume and brightness (light intensity) are adjusted in that state. Then, even if the situation does not normally shift to the adjustment screen, such as a situation other than in the demo screen, the adjustment screen may be transitioned to by operating the effect button in a predetermined state. .. As the "predetermined state" here, for example, a gaming state in which the effect button used for adjustment is not scheduled to be used can be mentioned. More specifically, for example, the standby screen B is being displayed, the symbol is changing, or the jackpot game is being played. Further, regarding the "predetermined state", it may be in a state in which it does not matter whether it is in a probabilistic state or in an electric support state during the fluctuation.

Further, the above-mentioned adjustment meter is also displayed on the adjustment screen (FIG. 33 (c)) displayed under such conditions. Further, the display priority (display priority) of the adjustment screen in the situation is from the decorative symbol (effect symbol 190a to 190c) or the hold display area (first hold number display unit 196 or second hold number display unit 197). May be higher or lower. Further, on the adjustment screen displayed by satisfying the above-mentioned "predetermined state" condition, the display of the adjustment meter as described above is, for example, an image object having a simpler design than the example of FIG. 33 (c). It is conceivable to use a simple image). This is done because it is suitable when the need for other displays is higher. The above-mentioned simple image display is performed on a normal adjustment screen, for example, only the volume adjustment meter or the light amount adjustment meter is displayed relatively small on the screen or is displayed semi-transparently. It is desirable that the visibility is lower than in the case.

Even on the adjustment screen displayed under such conditions, the volume, the amount of light, and the like can be adjusted by using the cross key (96). In order to display the adjustment screen (including the simple image), for example, in addition to the control mode such as pressing the operation button (22) during the fluctuation to display the adjustment screen (simple image), the operation button (22) is displayed during the fluctuation. It is possible to adopt a control mode such as directly operating the cross key (96) without pressing. As a specific example, when the cross key (96) is operated during the fluctuation when the adjustment screen (simple image) is hidden, the adjustment screen (simple image) is displayed and the cross key (simplified image) is further displayed during the display. By additionally operating 96), the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted. In addition to that, when the cross key (96) is operated during the fluctuation when the adjustment screen (simple image) is hidden, the adjustment screen (simple image) is displayed and both the volume and the amount of light are adjusted. (The display of the adjustment screen and the adjustment of the volume or the amount of light are performed at the same time by one operation of the cross key). Further, even when touch detection and these operations are performed at the same time, each process may be executed at the same time, and in that case, the touch effect is changed so as not to affect the recognition of the adjustment result by the player. And output.
<Regulations for the second and subsequent times>

27 (a) and 27 (b) are related to the "pros and cons of directing" shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b) described above. Then, FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b) are related to "after a predetermined number of times" of "number of changes, etc." related to touch detection, and the "change state" is the second time for the effect that can be executed for the first time. It shows whether or not the production is regulated in the case of subsequent cases.

Specifically, in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b), "setting change relationship", "waiting for game", "during symbol change", and "hit" are shown as "types of effect to be executed when the detection state changes". The rules for the production of each state of "medium" and "probability change (electric support)" are shown. Further, for these states, it is stipulated whether or not the "effect change function based on the effect button operation" and the "effect by touch detection" are executed. That is, with respect to the second and subsequent detection state changes related to the effect buttons (operation buttons 22 and the like) and the second and subsequent detection state changes related to the touch detection of the firing handle 20, whether or not there are effect restrictions in each state of the gaming machine. Is stipulated.

Further, in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b), “with regulation” is indicated by a symbol “◯”, and “without regulation” is indicated by a symbol “x”. Furthermore, the “Δ” symbol indicates that it is further subdivided according to the situation (“depending on the case”).

For example, when the state of the gaming machine is "setting change" of "setting change relation" and "setting display", "effect change function based on effect button operation" and "touch detection" In this case, the production regulation for "production, etc." is "x".

In addition, when the state of the gaming machine is "waiting for game", the "demo screen", "adjustment screen", "variable standby screen", "initialization notification", and "abnormality notification" are the same as those described above. Is provided. In this case, the effect regulation for the "effect change function based on the effect button operation" is "x". Also, regarding "directing by touch detection", "demo screen" is "○", "adjustment screen" is "△", "variation standby screen" is "○", and "initialization notification" is "△". , "Abnormality notification" is "x".

Subsequently, when the state of the gaming machine is "during symbol change", "when the symbol is stopped", "when reaching", "during specific production", and "abnormal display screen" are provided in the same manner as described above. ing. In this case, the effect regulation for the "effect change function based on the effect button operation" is "x". In addition, regarding "effects by touch detection, etc.", "when the symbol is stopped" is "△", "when reaching" is "○", "during specific production" is "○", and "abnormal display screen" is "×". ".

Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the state of the gaming machine is "hit", "during the start demo", "during the round", "between the rounds", and "during the round", as in the case described above. "During specific production" and "At the end of the demo" are provided. In this case, the effect regulation for the "effect change function based on the effect button operation" is "x". In addition, the production regulation in this case regarding "effect by touch detection, etc." is "○".

Furthermore, when the state of the gaming machine is "probability change (electric support)", "when the symbol is stopped", "when reaching", "during specific production", and "abnormal display screen" are displayed in the same manner as described above. It is provided. In this case, the effect regulation for the "effect change function based on the effect button operation" is "x". In addition, the production regulation in this case regarding "effect by touch detection, etc." is "○".
<Specific examples of production output timing in each state of the gaming machine>
<< Example of production output timing in the state after setting change >>

Next, a specific example of the effect output in each state of the gaming machine will be described in relation to the above-mentioned “pros and cons of effect” (FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b)). First, the timing chart of FIG. 28 shows an example of the effect output when the setting is changed. More specifically, FIG. 28 shows an example of the effect output in the period from the start of the setting change when the power is turned on to the end of the setting change and the standby state. Further, in relation to the game state shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, after passing through "C3: setting change (probability change) in progress state" of "C: special state", "B11: in game standby state" Corresponds to the situation of shifting from "game standby A (normal demo display)" to "B12; game standby state B (design stopped)".

The "control state" shown at the top of FIG. 28 indicates the state of the gaming machine, and this "control state" becomes "initial setting in progress" in which the above-mentioned initial setting process (FIG. 15) is performed when the power is turned on. The mode shifts to the "setting change mode" in which the above-mentioned setting change process (FIG. 16) is performed by operating the setting key. Further, the setting change is completed, the mode shifts to the "normal mode", and the standby state (game standby state) as described above is entered. Under such a premise, the influence on the state-corresponding output when there is an effect button or touch detection, and the touch effect performed at that time are shown in the next and subsequent stages.

When the power is turned on and the initial setting is completed, and then the setting change mode is entered based on the setting key being inserted, the corresponding "image display" is displayed during the setting change, as shown in "Status correspondence output". , "Audio output", "Lamp output" is performed. When the operation button 22 or the like is operated in this state, the state-corresponding output does not change, and the corresponding "image", "sound", and "lamp" outputs continue during the setting change. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "None" to "Yes" while changing the setting, there is no change in the state-corresponding output, but there is a change in the touch detection, as in the case when the effect button is operated. The lamp effect indicating is executed for a certain period of time. Further, after that, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", the touch effect is not executed and the state-corresponding output does not change.

Here, as the output related to the "image display" during the setting change, for example, the one shown in FIG. 36B can be exemplified. Specifically, the text "Settings are being changed" and the message "Settings are being changed. After the setting change is completed, the frame door will be closed to shift to normal game." There is. Further, although not shown, as the output of "setting being changed" related to "audio output", an example of performing audio output of "setting being changed" can be exemplified, and "setting being changed" related to "lamp display" can be exemplified. As the output of "", an example of driving a plurality of predetermined LEDs in a pattern determined in advance as the output of "setting is being changed" can be exemplified.

Next, when the above-mentioned setting change is completed and the setting change process is completed, the control state shifts to the normal mode. At this time, the state-corresponding output is, for example, the output of the "standby screen A" as shown in FIG. 33A as the "image display". In addition, as "audio output", audio output indicating "change completed" such as "setting change completed" is performed. Further, regarding the "lamp display", the "demo display" is performed according to the drive pattern at the time of the standby demo. Further, when the setting change is completed, the restriction on the touch effect in the standby screen after clearing the prohibition timer for the touch effect related to "J: Setting of permission timing" in FIG. 23 is released.

In this state, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", the touch notification or the like corresponding to the state of the standby screen A is executed. Specifically, a voice such as "Welcome. Enjoy pachinko today!" Is output in the voice of the character appearing in the game machine as the above-mentioned production related to the character and the production to promote the game. A lamp display linked to the voice is executed, and a character image is displayed in the display area (see FIGS. 25 and 34 (a) if necessary). Since the touch detection is set to change from "none" to "yes" as the trigger for the standby screen to change from A to B, the image display related to the notification is as shown in FIG. 34 (b). , The character image and the character display such as "Welcome ♪" are executed while the standby screen B is displayed. After the production prohibition timer is cleared, the production prohibition timer is set at the timing when the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", and the production is performed at the timing when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no". The timing of the prohibition timer is started, and a more specific processing mode for the effect output associated with such touch detection will be described later.

Next, when the standby screen A is displayed, the touch detection changes from "none" to "yes", and after the touch notification effect based on this and the state change to the standby screen B are performed, the touch detection is performed again. If this is done, the processing such as the effect based on the touch detection will change depending on the timing at which the touch detection is performed. FIG. 28 illustrates a case where the touch detection changes from “none” to “yes” when the standby screen A is displayed, and then the counting time of the effect timer does not become “0”. In that case, the touch effect is not executed. Further, the prohibition timer for the touch effect related to the above-mentioned "J: Setting of permission timing" is set to an initial value (for example, 60 seconds). Then, after that, when the touch detection changes from "yes" to "no", the time counting of the effect prohibition timer is started.

As described above, as described in the flow from turning on the power to shifting to the normal mode (standby screen) through the setting change mode, the effect based on the touch detection is the gaming state of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 22 described above. It is configured so that the presence / absence of execution and the execution content are set according to the effect permission regulation conditions shown in FIG. Here, the production prohibition timer related to the production permission regulation condition will be described in detail.

The effect prohibition timer is a timekeeping timer for determining whether or not to allow execution of an effect based on the change when the "touch detection" changes. Further, the effect prohibition timer functions as a timekeeping timer in "H1: Timekeeping timer processing (addition / subtraction / clear, etc.)" shown in FIG. 23, and as an internal timer in "J: Allow timing setting". Is. For example, in the example of FIG. 28, when the setting change is completed, the effect prohibition timer is cleared. Then, regardless of the time of the effect prohibition timer, the process of allowing the execution of the touch effect is performed.

Next, if there is a touch detection during the display of the "standby screen A" as shown in the "image display" of the "state correspondence output", the touch effect is not allowed during the subsequent predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). In addition, a process of setting "60 seconds" in the effect prohibition timer is performed. Then, when the CPU 521 is notified that the finger is separated from the firing handle (20) and the touch detection is changed (here, it is turned from on to off), the process of starting the subtraction of the effect prohibition timer is performed.

If the touch is detected again after the above-mentioned subtraction is started (while the effect prohibition timer is being subtracted) and before the effect prohibition timer becomes "0", the effect prohibition timer is set to the time (for example) again. 60 seconds) is set, and when the state changes to a state different from the touch detection, the timing of the effect prohibition timer is started. That is, a process for controlling so that the touch effect is not executed for a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) after the last recognition of the touch change is performed.

It should be noted that the effect prohibition timer can be used both when the touch detection changes from "no ⇒ yes" and when the touch detection changes to "yes ⇒ no", and when the effect related to the touch detection is executed. It is possible to prepare for each case.
<< Example of production output in the state of the adjustment screen >>

Next, an example of effect output in the state of the "adjustment screen" related to the above-mentioned environment setting (customization) will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the state of the "adjustment screen", the "control state" becomes "initial setting" when the power is turned on, and shifts to the "normal mode" when the power is restored (power supply is restored). It has shifted to a standby state (game standby state) such as. Then, the state of the "adjustment screen" is set, the environment setting is performed, the environment setting is completed, and the state shifts to the standby state. Further, in relation to the game states shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, "B13: game standby C (setting screen for production / sound, etc.)" and "B11: game standby A (normal)" of "B1: game standby state". Demo display) ”is supported.

In the example of FIG. 29, when there is a power failure recovery, the "image display" of the "state-corresponding output" becomes the "standby screen A". Furthermore, "audio output" is not performed, and "lamp display" is "demo display".

As shown at the bottom of the figure, when there is an operation of the "effect button", the "image display" becomes the "adjustment screen" at the timing of the end of the operation detection. Further, the "audio output" becomes "adjustment audio (irregular)", which can output the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment operation (adjusted volume) (sample output) or the adjustment screen (for example, FIG. 33). (C)) It is possible to output the operation sound of the cursor movement in (c). In this case, since the input of the adjustment operation is required, it is treated as "irregular".

Further, the "lamp display" is "light emission during adjustment". This outputs light according to the emission brightness (light amount) set at that time. In the example of FIG. 29, the button operation of the "effect button" is detected, and the "state-based output" is performed based on the timing at which the detection of the operation is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the button. The "state-corresponding output" may be performed based on the timing of the start of detection of the operation.

In this state, if there is "touch detection", the "image display" in the "touch effect" is not performed, but the "sound effect" and the "lamp effect" are performed in the mode of touch notification. By preventing the "image display" from being performed in this way, it is possible to prevent the work of environment setting (customization) performed while viewing the screen display from being hindered. Further, when the adjustment operation is completed as shown in the central portion of the uppermost row in the drawing, the "image display" of the "state correspondence output" becomes the "standby screen A". Further, although "audio output" is not performed, the "lamp display" can be in the form of "demo display".

In the example of FIG. 29, when there is "touch detection" after the adjustment operation is completed, touch notification is performed by "image display", "sound effect", and "lamp display". Then, when there is a touch notification at this time, the "image display" of the "state-corresponding output" is switched from the "standby screen A" to the "standby screen B". The effect is not limited to the change from the "standby screen A" to the "standby screen B". For example, a touch notification (such as displaying the characters "welcome") is superimposed on the "standby screen A". After that, the screen may shift to the "standby screen B".

Further, in the example of FIG. 29, the effect prohibition timer is cleared when there is a power failure recovery, and is set when there is touch detection. Further, the time counting is started based on the timing of the end of the touch detection, and then the value of the effect prohibition timer is set to "0". Further, the effect prohibition timer is set in the subsequent touch detection, and the time counting is started based on the timing of the end of the touch detection.

In the example of FIG. 29, since the power is restored (normally) without changing the setting, the effect prohibition timer is cleared after the power failure is restored, and the time of the effect prohibition timer before the power failure is determined. Regardless, it allows the execution of touch effects.
<< Example of production output in the state of the reach screen >>

Subsequently, an example of the effect output in the state where the reach effect is performed (the state of the reach screen) will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the "reach screen" state, when the change start condition of the special symbol (and the effect symbol) is satisfied, the "control state" is indicated by the rising edge of the "symbol changing" diagram. At the same time, the symbol change is started. At this time, since it is usually in the state of being played, the state of detecting "touch detection" continues.

In the example of FIG. 30, the "image display" of the "state-corresponding output" is the "standby screen B" until the symbol variation is started. Further, the "audio output" is the output of the "BGM" corresponding to the "standby screen B", and the "lamp display" is the "demo display". When the symbol change is started in this state, the "image display" becomes the "acceleration effect". As this "acceleration effect", an example can be exemplified in which the effect symbol (190) starts to fluctuate and accelerates to a high-speed fluctuation.

Further, in the example of FIG. 30, after the "image display" is in the state of "notice effect / tenpai (tempai) fanning effect, etc.", it becomes "design listening" and reach occurs. Here, "notice production, tenpai fanning production, etc." means production of contents that fuel the expectation of reach occurrence through various warning productions. In addition, as the "design tenpai", for example, an example is an effect for the player to have the expectation that the second temporarily stopped effect symbol constitutes a combination of the first temporarily stopped effect symbol and the reach. it can. Then, in the "image display", the "reach effect" is executed, and then the "design stop" effect is executed in a manner according to the result of the winning / losing lottery.

Further, in the "voice output", with the start of the symbol change, the "speech changing voice" associated with the changing effect of the effect symbol 190 is output. Further, in the "lamp display", the "lamp effect during symbol change" associated with the effect during change of the effect symbol 190 is performed with the start of the symbol change.

At the time of such a reach effect, it is conceivable to execute a "touch effect" for keeping the player's hand on the firing handle (20). For example, in the example of FIG. 30, the state with "touch detection" that had been continued until then is temporarily interrupted during the "reach effect". Then, after that, there is a second "touch detection" in the period shown in FIG. 30, and after a certain detection period, the state changes to the state without "touch detection". Then, based on the timing at which the second touch detection is stopped, the "predetermined display" is performed in the "image display" of the "touch effect", the "predetermined sound" is output in the "sound effect", and the "lamp" is output. "Predetermined light emission" is performed in "Direction".

As these "predetermined display", "predetermined voice", and "predetermined light emission", it is possible to execute an effect of notifying the game result and an effect of suppressing the stop of the game. For example, it is conceivable to directly or indirectly show the degree of expectation related to the occurrence of reach or big hit, or to output the "predetermined display" or "predetermined voice" of the content of "Keep your hands on". Be done. Further, the character display (382) of "heat!" In FIG. 37 (b) described above also corresponds to the "predetermined display" here. Further, when the effect of "sound" or the effect of "lamp" is accompanied, these correspond to "predetermined sound" or "predetermined light emission".

Here, in the example of FIG. 30, counting without "touch detection" is started based on the start timing of "reach effect". Then, after the start of the "reach effect", the first detection of the state without "touch detection" becomes the first detection without "touch detection", and the subsequent detection of the state without "touch detection" in the example of FIG. 30 is 2. There is no "touch detection" for the second time.
<< Example of production output in the state of the big hit end demo screen >>

Next, an example of production output in a state where the jackpot end demo production is being performed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the "control state" changes from the normal control state to the big hit control state by starting the big hit, and when the big winning opening opening / closing control (round control related to the big hit game) is completed, the state of the big hit end demo is displayed. Become. Furthermore, when the jackpot demo state ends, it returns to the normal control state. Here, in the example of FIG. 31, the big hit start demo is produced before the big hit start, but the big hit start demo is not shown with respect to the “control state”.

When the big hit is started, the "image display" of the "state-corresponding output" shifts from the previous "design stop" effect to the "big hit medium effect". The "big hit production" here includes productions during and between rounds. Furthermore, the "voice output" shifts from the "design variation" to the "big hit medium production". The "big hit middle production" related to the "voice output" here includes a voice indicating the progress of the round (round progress voice) and an output of the winning sound during the round (winning sound output).

In addition, the "lamp display" will shift from the "demo display" up to that point to the "big hit medium production". The "big hit middle production" related to the "lamp display" here includes the production during and between rounds. Each of the "big hit middle effects" related to these "image display", "audio output", and "lamp display" is performed until the end of the big winning opening opening / closing control. Further, in the example of FIG. 31, the "touch detection" at this time continues to be in the state of having "touch detection".

When the opening / closing control of the big winning opening is completed, the "image display" and the "ramp display" of the "state-corresponding output" shift to the respective "big hit end demo display". Further, the "audio output" shifts to the "big hit end demo BGM, etc." In addition, when the jackpot demo is completed, the "image display" shifts to the "design stop". Further, the "voice output" and the "lamp display" are stopped during the "design stop". Then, when the "design stop" of the "image display" is completed, the "audio output" becomes "BGM", and the "lamp display" corresponds to the state of the gaming machine thereafter.

Here, in FIG. 31, the reason why the characters are not described in the diagram related to the "lamp display" after the "design stop" is completed (the reason why the characters are blank) depends on the state of the gaming machine. This is because it changes and is difficult to identify in the figure. In the example of FIG. 31, the "voice output" and the "ramp display" are stopped during the "symbol stop", but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the BGM in which the symbol is stopped (the game mode at that time). BGM etc.) or a lamp display pattern may be provided to output these.

In the example of FIG. 31, after the big winning opening opening / closing control is completed, the state without "touch detection" is temporarily changed to the state with "touch detection" during the subsequent big hit end demonstration. Furthermore, during the big hit end demo, the state without "touch detection" and the state with "touch detection" are also changed.

As for the "touch effect", the "predetermined display" related to the "image effect" and the "predetermined sound" related to the "voice effect" are based on the timing when the "touch detection" is first eliminated during the jackpot end demo. , "Predetermined light emission" related to "lamp effect" is also executed. The "predetermined display", "predetermined voice", and "predetermined light emission" at this time are related to, for example, an effect for preventing forgetting to take a game card or a game coin that stores the amount of game media, and a game result during jackpot control. The production for notification can be mentioned.

In the example of FIG. 31, the subsequent touch detection is the detection with the first "touch detection". Further, the subsequent touch detection during the jackpot end demonstration is said to be the detection with the second "touch detection". Then, based on the timing when the second "touch detection" is performed, the "predetermined display" related to the "image effect", the "predetermined sound" related to the "sound effect", and the "predetermined light emission" related to the "lamp effect" are again generated. Is also executed.

In this way, when the "predetermined display", "predetermined sound", and "predetermined light emission" are performed multiple times (here, twice) during the same type of period (here, during the big hit end demonstration), the "predetermined display" is used. , It is desirable to make different elements such as the content and type of "predetermined voice" and "predetermined light emission". For example, when the effect for preventing forgetting to take a game card or a game coin is executed as the previous "touch effect", the effect for notifying the game result during jackpot control is performed as the later "touch effect". , It is possible to exemplify the production of contents that promote the motivation for the next game.

The production output examples in some states of the gaming machine have been described above based on FIGS. 28 to 31, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to consider production output examples in other states. is there.
<Example of production output after recovery from power failure>
<< When the game is on standby (any of the display screens A to C) when the power is turned off >>

Next, an example of the effect output after the power failure is restored will be described. FIG. 32A conceptually shows screen display control when the power is turned on again (returned to power failure) when the state of the gaming machine at the time of power off is the game standby state. .. Here, as the game standby state, the above-mentioned "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)", "B12: game standby B (design stopped)", "B13: game standby C (directing / sound setting, etc.)" Screens) ”(standby screen A, standby screen B, effect setting screen C, etc.) can be exemplified.

When the power is restored as shown in the left end of FIG. 32A after the power is cut off in the above-mentioned various gaming machine standby states, the sub-control means (here, CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301) is its own. After the initialization process, it waits for the reception of a command (power restoration command) indicating power restoration from the main control means (here, CPU 501 of the main board 102).

At this point, the image is not displayed on the image display device (here, the effect display device 60) (corresponding to "screen non-display" in the figure). After that, the sub-main CPU 521 receives the power return command from the main CPU 501, and from the command contents and the like, it is determined that the RWM is not cleared or the setting is changed at the time of return, and that the game state is waiting for the game. Then, the power restoration process based on the condition is performed, and the initialization process is completed.

When the initialization process is completed (corresponding to "ready" in the figure), the sub-main CPU 521 performs normal processing (processing for updating the effect random number, lamp display control, voice control, etc.) and the effect display device. In (60), the sub-main command for displaying the standby screen A is output regardless of which of the standby screens A to C is displayed before the power is turned off. Further, the sub-main CPU 521 clears the value of the timekeeping timer for changing the screen (sets it to a predetermined value), and then executes a power-on notification process for notifying that the power is restored without clearing the RWM.

As an example of the effect display by the power-on notification process, for example, the characters "power is restored" and "energized" shown in FIG. 35 (a) are displayed on the effect display device (60), and the gaming machine frame ( An example of lighting the LED of 11) in a predetermined lighting pattern can be exemplified. Further, it is conceivable that the effect display by the power-on notification process is continuously executed for a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds). In this embodiment, even if the power-on notification is executed after the initialization process is completed, the operation means (operation button (22) which is an effect button) can be operated by the above-mentioned normal process. The input is judged, and the standby screen can be changed according to the input. Such power-on notification processing and normal processing are shown as "power-on notification" and "normal processing (individual processing, waiting for command / operation means input)" in the figure. Further, "individual processing" means individual display control processing, random number update processing, timekeeping processing, and the like.

When it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed based on the timekeeping timer after the timekeeping timer is initialized due to the completion of the initialization process as described above (the value of the timekeeping timer becomes "0" by subtraction). Or when the timekeeping timer reaches a predetermined value (30 seconds in this case) due to addition, it is determined that the standby screen display change time (corresponding to "time A") has arrived, and the screen display is waited for. Change from screen A to standby screen B. Then, a value corresponding to the time when the standby screen B changes to the standby screen A again is set in the timekeeping timer. For example, if the timekeeping timer adds, the arrival time "20 seconds" is set, and if the timekeeping timer subtracts, the value required to reach "0" (for example, 2 ms). Set 10000 etc., which becomes 0 in 20 seconds by subtraction for each interrupt.

Then, as in the case of the standby screen A, when a predetermined time elapses after the standby screen B is displayed (for example, when the timekeeping timer is subtracted to "0", or the timekeeping timer is added. When it becomes "20 seconds", etc.), it is determined that the display change time of the standby screen (corresponding to "time B") has arrived, and the screen display is changed from the standby screen B to the standby screen A. When the game is played while the standby screen A or the standby screen B is displayed and the start winning opening (62, 63) is won, the screen changes to the symbol variation screen, and when the firing handle 20 is touched. Is screen-transitioned to the content corresponding to the touch detection (such as the superimposed display of the characters "Welcome"). In the example of FIG. 32 (a), it is assumed that neither the operation of the operation button (22) nor the touch detection is performed.
<< If the design is changing when the power is turned off >>

Next, based on FIG. 32 (b), an example of effect output when the symbol is changing when the power is turned off will be described. FIG. 32B is a concept regarding screen display control when the power is turned off when the symbol is changing and the hold has not occurred, and then the power is turned on again (returned to the power failure). Is shown.

As described above, when the power is restored after the power is cut off while the symbol is changing with 0 pending, the sub-main CPU 521 first performs its own initialization processing and then receives the power restoration command from the main CPU 501. wait. At this point, the image is not displayed on the effect display device (60) (corresponding to "screen non-display" in the figure). After that, when the power return command from the main CPU 501 is received, and it is determined from the command contents, etc. that the RWM is not cleared or the setting is changed at the time of recovery, or that the game state is in the process of changing the symbol, the condition is determined. The power restoration process is performed based on the above, and the initialization process is completed.

When the initialization process is completed (corresponding to "ready" in the figure), the sub-main CPU 521 displays the power-on notification screen (for example, "power is turned on") or FIG. 35 (b) on the effect display device (60). ) Is displayed, such as the character display of "energized" and the display indicating that the symbol is changing), and the state is maintained until the symbol stop command from the main board 102 is received. In this embodiment, the screen display is different from the power-on notification performed during the standby screen. As an example of producing the power-on notification (power-on notification screen) at this time, the one shown in FIG. 35 (b) can be adopted. Further, even if the power-on notification is executed after the initialization process is completed, the input of the operation means (effect button) is determined by the normal process, and if the input is valid, the input is input. It is possible to execute the processing according to. Such power-on notification output and normal processing are shown as "power-on notification screen" and "normal processing (individual processing, waiting for command / operation means input)" in the figure. Further, "individual processing" means individual display control processing, random number update processing, timekeeping processing, and the like.

When the CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301 receives the symbol stop command from the main board 102 (corresponding to the "stop command" in the figure), the symbol corresponding to the symbol stop command information or the information based on the power recovery command (in advance). If the symbol to be stopped can be grasped from the determined default symbol combination and information, the screen in which the symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, the same symbol change standby as the standby screen B as shown in FIG. 34 (c). Display the screen. Here, in the present embodiment, when the symbol is fluctuating when the power is turned off (power is restored), the timekeeping timer is not initialized because the initialization process is completed, and the timekeeping timer is received at the timing when the stop command is received. Is set so that the standby screen B is always displayed after receiving the stop command.

After that, as in the explanation when the game is waiting, when a predetermined time elapses after the standby screen B is displayed (when the timekeeping timer is subtracted to "0", or the timekeeping timer is added. (When it becomes "20 seconds", etc.) It is determined that the display change time of the standby screen (corresponding to "time B" in the figure) has arrived, and the screen display is changed from the standby screen B to the standby screen A. If a game is played while the power-on notification screen is displayed and the start winning opening (62, 63) is won, the standby screen B is displayed in response to the reception of the stop command, and then the screen changes to the symbol change screen. Further, when the firing handle (20) is touched, the screen transitions to the content corresponding to the touch detection (such as the superimposed display of the characters "welcome") is performed.

Although not shown, in both cases of FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), the initial operation confirmation process normally performed on the movable effect member which is a movable accessory is the initialization process. Later, it can be executed in parallel with these display processes, etc., and the processes are executed until the confirmation of the initial operation of the movable accessory is completed without being related to the display transition of the screen (the screen display is shown in the figure). 32 (a) and (b) are performed, while the operation for confirming the movable accessory is performed). Further, until the confirmation of the initial operation of the movable accessory is completed, the execution of the effect of the movable accessory due to the symbol change is controlled. In the example of FIG. 32 (b), it is assumed that neither the operation of the operation button (22) nor the touch detection is performed. In addition, an effect pattern in which the movable accessory operates is selected by operating the operation button (22) of the player, and the effect pattern is generated (executed) during the initial operation of the movable effect member, and the player actually performs the effect. When the operation button (22) is operated, the execution (actual drive) of the effect of the movable effect member is restricted.
<Touch detection, touch effect and other characteristics>

The touch detection and touch effect described so far can be considered as follows. First, regarding the touch effect (launch detection effect) executed during standby (during standby screen A or standby screen B), the game is actually played by detecting the launch operation (touch detection and detection of change in firing intensity volume). The execution time of the touch effect is shorter than the measured value (for example, the average value related to multiple actual measurements) until the ball is launched and enters the starting winning opening (for example, the first starting winning opening 62). can do. It is conceivable that the touch effect in this case will be completed in about 3 seconds.

On the contrary, for the touch effect (launch detection effect) executed during standby (during standby screen A or standby screen B), the firing operation is detected (touch detection and detection of change in firing intensity volume). The execution time of the touch effect is longer than the measured value (for example, the average value related to multiple actual measurements) until the game ball is actually launched and enters the starting winning opening (for example, the first starting winning opening 62). It may be made longer, and in that case, the touch effect may be about 20 seconds. In that case, if a notice effect is generated in response to a ball entering the first start winning opening (62) during the execution of the touch effect for 20 seconds, this notice effect is performed by a predetermined first group (for example, a character). If it is a simple notice such as a line notice of the content that utters a line), the touch effect is left executed, and this notice effect is another predetermined second group (for example, a movie notice that uses the full screen of the display device). If it is a non-simple notice), it is conceivable that the touch effect will be interrupted.

Further, although it cannot normally occur, even if the touch detection is performed after the rotation operation of the firing handle (20) (during the rotation of the handle), the touch effect (launch detection effect) can be executed.

Further, if there is a start opening prize during the execution of the touch effect (launch detection effect), it is possible not to interrupt the touch effect. However, in the case of a touch effect such as voice, the volume may be continuously set to "zero" according to the priority of the effect at the time of winning the start opening. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and if there is a start opening prize during the execution of the touch effect (launch detection effect), the touch effect may be interrupted.

Further, when an error is detected and the error notification is executed during the execution of the touch effect, the error notification can be prioritized over the touch effect. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the touch effect and the error notification may be output in duplicate. For example, if the first error (illegal winning error, porcelain detection error, etc.) is detected, the touch effect is interrupted, but if the second error (launch direction improper error, door opening error, etc.) is not interrupted, the touch effect is not interrupted. It is possible to adopt a control mode.

In addition, when the touch effect is executed during the volume adjustment during customization (environment setting), the audio output related to the touch effect is output according to the volume adjusted at the start of the touch effect even during the volume adjustment. It is possible to do it.

Furthermore, it is also possible to prohibit the touch effect during volume adjustment during customization (environment setting), and not to execute the touch effect even if the touch effect is performed in other situations. is there.

Further, the touch effect (launch detection effect) is interrupted when a game ball is detected at, for example, the start winning opening (62, 63) during execution, but is interrupted at the operating opening (68) or the general winning opening (72). It is also possible to adopt a control mode in which the game ball is not interrupted when it is detected.
<About operation detection signal>

Next, various possible examples of the operation detection signal (touch detection signal) related to touch detection will be described. As described above, when considering various aspects of the effect output related to the touch effect, it is also possible to specifically consider the operation detection signal related to the touch detection operation, to ensure the reliability of the effect control, etc. It is important from the aspect of. First, regarding the operation detection signal, it is conceivable to consider "1. Use of the operation detection signal", "2. Transmission method of the operation detection signal", "3a. Processing when the operation detection signal is received" and the like. Be done.

Among these, "1. Use of operation detection signal" can be used for various processes or can be used as an opportunity for various processes. For example, the operation detection signal can be "(1) Guarantee of operation by the player". Further, the operation detection signals are "(2) trigger for transition between demo state and normal state", "(3) trigger for transition to special production state", "(4) trigger for return from power saving mode", and "( 5) External output trigger "," (6) Suggestion (method change) trigger for launching, etc. "," (7) Used for production (trigger) "," (8) Used for fixed handle detection and notification "," ( 9) It can be used to change the production frequency, etc. "

As a signal generation method when the operation detection signal is used as the above-mentioned "(2) Trigger for transition between the demo state and the normal state", the detection signal of the touch detection unit is used as a dedicated detection unit for the sub-main board (301). It is possible to adopt the method of outputting from (the first method). As a dedicated detection unit for the sub-main board 301, a touch detection unit (touch sensor) in which an output signal is input only to the sub-main board (301) can be mentioned.

Further, as another signal generation method, it is also possible to adopt a method (second method) in which the signal (detection signal) of the above-mentioned dedicated detection unit is subjected to some processing (signal processing) and used. In this case, it is premised that a shared detection unit (shared detection unit) in which an output signal is input to both the main board (102) and the sub-main board (301) is used, and the signal from the shared detection unit is used. It can be used after some processing (signal processing).

Further, a method (third method) of synthesizing the output signals of the dedicated detection unit and the shared detection unit with other signals can be considered. In this case, the output status information appearing in the "other signal" is combined with the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the shared detection unit, and the main board (102) or the sub is used as a reference signal for detection related to the change in the operating state. It is conceivable to output to the main board (301).

As a feature of the above-mentioned first method and second method, since it is not necessary to synthesize with other signals, processing and equipment for signal generation are not required as compared with the third method, and processing and equipment are required. Sometimes the configuration can be simplified.

Further, as another feature of the above-mentioned second method, since the generation of input signals to a plurality of different input targets (here, the main board (102) and the sub-main board (301)) can be shared, each input can be made common. In some cases, the processing and device configuration can be simplified as compared with the case where the input signal is generated individually for the target. In consideration of the influence of chattering on the touch switch (310), it is conceivable to require a touch for a certain period of time (for example, 50 ms) or longer to improve the detection accuracy. Of course, by using a capacitor with an appropriate capacitance, it is possible to configure it so that an output can be obtained during continuous detection for a predetermined time.

Further, as a feature of the third method, it is possible to perform processing on the main board (102) or the sub-main board (301) by using a signal in a form other than the output signal form of the dedicated detection unit or the shared detection unit. it can. Therefore, processing can be performed on the main board (102) or the sub-main board (301) without being restricted only by the form of the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the shared detection unit.

Regarding the above-mentioned "2. Method of transmitting operation detection signal", a processing mode in each control board can be considered according to the transmission path of the operation detection signal. For example, regarding the section from the touch sensor (310) to the launch control board (105), the signal line used for transmission from the touch sensor (310) shall be "(1) common to launch control". Or, it is conceivable that it is "(2) different from the one for launch control".

Here, as a mode in which the signal lines are common, if the touch sensor (310) is a three-wire type sensor, the three signal lines (power supply line, output) derived from the touch sensor (310) are derived. If the signal line, GND, etc.) are used as common and the touch sensor (310) is a two-wire type sensor, the two signal lines (output signal line and GND) derived from the touch sensor (310) are used. , Or the output signal line and the power supply line, etc.) are used as a common one.

Further, regarding the section from the launch control board (105) to the prize ball control board (payout control board 103), the signal line used for transmission shall be "(1) Independent signal line (output only for production)". It is also conceivable that "(2) common with other control signals". Of these, in the case of "(2) common with other control signals", it is conceivable to use a form (synthesis form) of synthesizing by a method such as different transmission timings.

Further, the section from the prize ball control board (payout control board 103) to the main control board (main board 102) is also set to "(1) an independent signal line" or "(2) with other control signals". It is possible to make it "common". Of these, in the case of "(2) common with other control signals", the form of sending and receiving in the form of a command (command format) or the form of synthesizing by a method such as different transmission timings (composite format). It is conceivable to send and receive with. Further, regarding the transmission timing, it is possible to consider a signal transmission mode in which transmission is not performed in a specific case.

Further, regarding the section from the main control board (main board 102) to the effect control board (sub-main board 301), "(1) independent signal lines" and "(2) common with other control signals" It is conceivable to say. Of these, in the case of "(1) independent signal lines", it is conceivable that signals are transmitted and received (regularly) at regular intervals, for example. Further, in the case of "(2) common with other control signals", transmission / reception is performed in a command format as in the section from the prize ball control board (payout control board 103) to the main control board (main board 102). It is also possible to use a composite format. Further, it is conceivable that the signal transmission timing is determined based on the relationship with the content and type of the previous transmission information.

Subsequently, the above-mentioned "3a. Processing when the operation detection signal is received" can be considered separately for various gaming states. The game states are "(1) during normal game", "(2) during special game (hit game)", "(3) abnormal", and "(4) during preparation (return to power failure / power failure)". Processing) ”,“ (5) During demonstration (not operated) ”,“ (6) During demonstration (My crack operation / effect setting operation) ”.

Among these game states, "(1) During normal game" includes a high base state and a low base state. Further, when the operation detection signal related to the touch detection is received on the launch control board (105), it is conceivable to perform "(1) only the launch control process when it is common with the launch process". This means that if the touch detection signal is received at the same time as the processing related to the launch control, only the processing related to the launch control is performed and the processing based on the touch detection signal is not performed. There is.

It is also possible to consider "(2) Ignore in cases other than those for launch control". This means that when the touch detection signal is received when the processing related to the firing control is not performed, the processing based on the touch detection is not performed.

Subsequently, in the prize ball control board (payout control board 103) and the main control board (main board 102), it is conceivable to store information related to touch detection until a command to be transmitted is transmitted. Further, in the main control board (main board 102), based on the touch detection information, the effect on the effect lottery related to the result, such as the fluctuation pattern (variation P) lottery, may or may not be given. It is conceivable to do so.

Subsequently, in the effect control board (sub-main board 301), the selection target is branched in determining an effect (variable effect, pre-reading effect, etc.) different from the effect related to the result based on the touch detection information ( If it is different, select the production). Further, even if the information based on the touch detection is received, it is conceivable that the processing based on the information is not performed, or that the processing for determining that the information is received is performed but no special processing is performed.

The processes related to "(1) during normal game" described here include other "(2) during special game (winning game)", "(3) abnormal", and "(4) preparing (electric power)". It can be appropriately adopted even in the states of "(5) during demonstration (not operated)" and "(6) during demonstration (my crack operation / effect setting operation)". Here, the "my pachi operation" is, for example, displaying a two-dimensional code for providing information to the player, or communicating information with the player's mobile information terminal (smartphone, etc.) via communication with the Internet server. It means an operation for providing a service such as performing. Further, the "effect setting operation" means an operation for the above-mentioned environment setting (customization).
<Action and effect of the invention according to this example>

As described above, various control elements have been examined for the relationship between touch detection and effect output, and by adopting appropriate control elements from the examined ones and applying them to the pachinko gaming machine 10, various control elements can be obtained. It is possible to execute the production based on this. Then, the operation detection of the firing handle including the touch detection can be utilized more effectively than before.

For example, as described above, "D: content of touch effect" is assumed in various ways, and subdivided into, for example, "D1: output destination of effect", "D2: effect data", and "D3: only state change". By defining the control process related to the effect output and adopting it in the pachinko gaming machine 10, various effects based on the handle operation become possible. The effect based on this steering wheel operation is further subdivided based on control elements such as "D1: output destination of effect", "D2: effect data", and "D3: only change the state". It is possible to

Further, as described above, various "E: selection criteria for touch effect" are assumed, and for example, "E1: game state (at touch timing)", "E2: number of operations", "E3: customized setting", etc. By subdividing into the above and defining the control processing related to the effect output and adopting it in the pachinko gaming machine 10, various effects based on the handle operation become possible. The effect based on this steering wheel operation is further subdivided based on control elements such as "E1: game state (at touch timing)", "E2: number of operations", and "E3: customized setting". It is possible to

Similarly, for the above-mentioned "F: change of effect state", "G: change of effect", "H: thing related to trigger parameter of touch effect", etc., various subdivided control elements are defined and a pachinko game is played. By adopting it in the machine 10, various effects based on the handle operation become possible. Furthermore, permission conditions and regulation conditions for production are defined as "J: permission timing setting", and other control elements are "K: change in touch state", "L: touch detection method", and "M: sub". By appropriately selecting these and applying them to the pachinko gaming machine 10, it is possible to make the effects based on the handle operation more diverse.

Then, by examining the touch effect in detail as described above and executing the touch effect according to the state of the gaming machine, the touch effect is based on the balance with the effect that has been continued before the touch detection. Can be executed. Then, the touch effect can be combined with the other effect without interfering with the other effect, and this combination also makes it possible to diversify the touch effect.

Further, by executing the touch effect for each of a plurality of touch detections, it is possible to diversify the entire effect by continuing the touch effect intermittently.
<Summary of Examples>

As described above, various aspects of the effect based on touch detection have been illustrated, and these can be summarized as follows.
<Summary 1>
In the invention according to the present embodiment, the game ball is launched into the game area, and the game ball enters the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. In a pachinko game machine, a pachinko game machine that changes and displays a symbol (special symbol, etc.) as a symbol game and then stops and displays it, and performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the stopped and displayed symbol has a predetermined display mode. Therefore, the main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game including the symbol game is communicably connected to the main control means, and the transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means. Sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that performs control processing according to the above, and effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) that output the effect under the control of the sub-control means, and the player. A touch detecting means (touch switch, etc.) for detecting the contact of the player and a rotation operation detecting means (launch intensity volume, etc.) for detecting the rotation operation of the player are provided. There is something that is output (touch effect, etc.) triggered by touch detection, which is the detection of contact.
As the state of the pachinko game machine, a game standby state (“B1: game standby state (normal demo display)” or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed, and the symbol game It has a game executing state (“B2: game in progress”, etc.) in which any of the special games is being executed, and in the game standby state, the output content of the effect by the sub-control means. Includes a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demo display)” to “B14: game standby (power saving)”, etc.), and any of the multiple types of game standby states Depending on the state, whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection may differ.
As a result, various effects can be executed by more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the launch handle.
<Summary 2>

In another invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and the game ball enters a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. A pachinko game in which a symbol (special symbol, etc.) is variablely displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a benefit to the player is performed. A machine, which is a main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of a game including the symbol game, and transmission information (main command) that is communicably connected to the main control means and transmitted from the main control means. Contact between a sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that performs control processing according to the sub-control means, and an effect output means (speaker, etc.) that outputs sound as an effect under the control of the sub-control means. The effect output means includes a touch detecting means (touch switch, etc.) for detecting the above, and a rotation operation detecting means (launch intensity volume, etc.) for detecting the rotation operation of the player. It is possible to execute voice output (sound output, etc.) triggered by touch detection, which is the detection of contact, and as the state of the pachinko game machine, neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed. A game standby state (“B1: game standby state (normal demo display)” or the like) and a game executing state (“B2: game in progress state”) in which either the symbol game or the special game is being executed. , Etc.), and the game standby state includes a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demo display)” to “B14: game standby (during power saving)”, etc.). Whether or not the sound is output triggered by the touch detection, and / or the sound output triggered by the touch detection, depending on which of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state. Is configured to be different.
As a result, various sound effects can be executed by more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 3>

In another invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and the game ball enters a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. A pachinko game in which a symbol (special symbol, etc.) is variablely displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a profit to the player is performed. It ’s a machine,
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game including the symbol game, and
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Touch detection means (touch switch, etc.) that detects the player's contact,
Rotation operation detection means (such as firing intensity volume) that detects the rotation operation of the player,
It is equipped with a production operation unit (operation buttons, cross keys, etc.) that is operated by the player during production.
Some of the effects are output (touch effect, etc.) triggered by touch detection, which is the detection of the player's contact by the touch detection means.
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, there is a game standby state (“B1: game standby state (normal demo display)” or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed.
In the game standby state, there are a plurality of types of game standby states in which the output contents of the effects produced by the sub-control means are different (“B11: game standby A (normal demo display)” to “B14: game standby (power saving)”, etc.). Including
The effect execution conditions are defined so that whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection can be different.
The conditions defined as the effect execution condition include which of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state, at which timing the touch detection is performed, and before the touch detection timing. Includes whether or not the effect operation unit has been operated.
As a result, it is possible to execute a touch effect related to the operation status of the effect operation unit while making more effective use of the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 4>

In another invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and the game ball enters a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. A pachinko game in which a symbol (special symbol, etc.) is variablely displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a profit to the player is performed. It ’s a machine,
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game including the symbol game, and
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Touch detection means (touch switch, etc.) that detects the player's contact,
It is equipped with a rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) that detects the rotation operation of the player.
Some of the effects are output (touch effect, etc.) triggered by touch detection, which is the detection of the player's contact by the touch detection means.
As the state of the pachinko game machine, a game standby state (“B1: game standby state (normal demo display)” or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed, and the symbol game It has a game executing state (“B2: game in progress”, etc.) in which any of the special games is being executed.
The pachinko gaming machine is provided with a backup means (such as a backup area on the main board) that can store the gaming state of the pachinko machine when the power is cut off due to a drop in the supply voltage.
The effect execution conditions are defined so that whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection can be different.
The conditions defined as the effect execution conditions include the timing of the touch detection and the gaming state of the pachinko machine stored in the backup means when the power is restored from the power failure. In the game standby state, there are a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demo display)” to “B14: game standby (during power saving)”, etc.) in which the output contents of the effects produced by the sub-control means are different. Including
Whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection, depending on which of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state. Is configured to be different.
As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate touch effect immediately after the power is turned on, while making more effective use of the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 5>

In another invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and the game ball enters a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. Taking this as an opportunity, as a symbol game, a special game that can give a profit to the player when the symbol (special symbol, etc.) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed, and the stopped displayed symbol is in the predetermined display mode. It ’s a pachinko game machine
As the time for fluctuating the symbol as the symbol game, one fluctuating time is set from a plurality of fluctuating times.
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game including the symbol game, and
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Touch detection means (touch switch, etc.) that detects the player's contact,
Rotation operation detection means (such as firing intensity volume) that detects the rotation operation of the player,
Equipped with a timekeeping means (timekeeping timer, etc.) to measure time,
Some of the effects are output (touch effect, etc.) triggered by touch detection, which is the detection of the player's contact by the touch detection means.
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state (“B1: game standby state (normal demo display)” or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed is executed.
It has a game execution state (“B2: game in progress”, etc.) in which either the symbol game or the special game is being executed.
The elapsed time in the game standby state is timed based on the timekeeping means.
It has an initialization means for setting the time measurement of the timekeeping means to an initial value based on the touch detection.
When the elapsed time in the game standby state reaches a predetermined time by the timekeeping means, the output of the effect triggered by the subsequent touch detection is permitted (“J11: Characteristic of time (variable / 1 variation)”. Comparison) ", etc.),
The predetermined time is set to be shorter than the longest fluctuation time (180 seconds, etc.) among the plurality of fluctuation times.
As a result, it is possible to appropriately set the permissible timing of the touch effect while making more effective use of the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 6>

In another invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and the game ball enters a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. Taking this as an opportunity, as a symbol game, a special game that can give a profit to the player when the symbol (special symbol, etc.) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed, and the stopped displayed symbol is in the predetermined display mode. It ’s a pachinko game machine
As the time for fluctuating the symbol as the symbol game, one fluctuating time is set from a plurality of fluctuating times.
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game including the symbol game, and
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Touch detection means (touch switch, etc.) that detects the player's contact,
Rotation operation detection means (such as firing intensity volume) that detects the rotation operation of the player,
The production operation unit operated by the player during the production,
Equipped with a timekeeping means (timekeeping timer, etc.) to measure time,
Some of the effects are output (touch effect, etc.) triggered by touch detection, which is the detection of the player's contact by the touch detection means.
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state (“B1: game standby state (normal demo display)” or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed is executed.
It has a game execution state (“B2: game in progress”, etc.) in which either the symbol game or the special game is being executed.
The elapsed time in the predetermined game standby state is timed based on the timekeeping means.
It has an initialization means for setting the time measurement of the timekeeping means to an initial value based on the touch detection.
When the elapsed time in the game standby state reaches a predetermined time by the timing means, the output of the effect triggered by the subsequent touch detection is permitted ("J2: Composite with other elements", etc.). ,
Even if the effect operation unit is operated before the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time (20 seconds, etc.) in the game standby state, if the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time, the subsequent touch detection The output of the production triggered by is allowed.
As a result, the touch effect can be executed regardless of the operation of the effect operation unit while more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 7>

In another invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and the game ball enters a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. A pachinko game in which a symbol (special symbol, etc.) is variablely displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a profit to the player is performed. It ’s a machine,
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game including the symbol game, and
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Touch detection means (touch switch, etc.) that detects the player's contact,
Rotation operation detection means (such as firing intensity volume) that detects the rotation operation of the player,
Equipped with a timekeeping means (timekeeping timer, etc.) to measure time,
Some of the effects are output (touch effect, etc.) triggered by touch detection, which is the detection of the player's contact by the touch detection means.
As the state of the pachinko game machine, a game standby state (“B1: game standby state (normal demo display)” or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed, and the symbol game It has a game executing state (“B2: game in progress”, etc.) in which any of the special games is being executed.
The pachinko gaming machine is provided with a backup means (such as a backup area on the main board) that can store the gaming state of the pachinko machine when the power is cut off due to a drop in the supply voltage.
When the power is restored, the normal return operation of returning the gaming state of the pachinko machine after the power is restored to the gaming state of the pachinko machine before the power is turned off based on the contents stored in the backup means. (Return operation when NO in S111 or S113) and the gaming state of the pachinko machine after the power is restored to the game standby state regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine before the power is turned off stored in the backup means. It is possible to perform a specific return operation (return operation when YES in S113).
The effect execution conditions are defined so that whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection can be different.
The conditions defined as the effect execution conditions include the game state of the pachinko machine after returning from the power off, and whether or not the elapsed time in the game standby state has reached a predetermined time by the timekeeping means. And are included,
It is configured to set the time of the time measuring means to a predetermined value (20 seconds, etc.) regardless of whether the time is restored by the normal restoration operation or the specific restoration operation when the power is restored. There is.
As a result, it is possible to control the execution of an appropriate touch effect even after the power is restored, while making more effective use of the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 8>

In another invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and the game ball enters a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. A pachinko game in which a symbol (special symbol, etc.) is variablely displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a profit to the player is performed. It ’s a machine,
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game including the symbol game, and
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Touch detection means (touch switch, etc.) that detects the player's contact,
It is equipped with a rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) that detects the rotation operation of the player.
The main control means
It is possible to give a profit to the player according to the result of the game, and it is possible to set the profit giving to the player (such as setting the degree of advantage of the player).
The state of the pachinko gaming machine includes a setting change state in which the setting can be made and a normal state different from the setting change state.
In the setting change state, the effect based on the detection by the touch detection means is not output regardless of the change mode of the detection state of the touch detection means and / or the detection mode of the rotation operation detection means. Has been done.
As a result, it is possible to limit the touch effect to the setting operation while making more effective use of the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 9>

In another invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and the game ball enters a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. A pachinko game in which a symbol (special symbol, etc.) is variablely displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a profit to the player is performed. It ’s a machine,
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game including the symbol game, and
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (effect display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Touch detection means (touch switch, etc.) that detects the player's contact,
It is equipped with a rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) that detects the rotation operation of the player.
The main control means can launch the game ball with an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation detected by the rotation operation detection means on condition that the touch detection is the detection of the player's contact by the touch detection means.
Some of the effects are output (touch effects, etc.) triggered by the touch detection.
The main control means
Even if the game ball enters the starting winning opening after the pachinko gaming machine is turned on and before the touch detecting means detects the player's contact, the variation display of the symbol is displayed. At the same time, the transmission information corresponding to the variation display of the symbol is transmitted to the sub-control means.
As a result, it is possible to make more effective use of the operation detection of the firing handle, and prevent the presence or absence of touch detection from limiting the progress of the symbol game. <Other Embodiments>

The present invention is not limited to the various embodiments described above, and can be variously modified. For example, the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine in which a gaming ball as a gaming medium acquired by a player is paid out directly to the player as described above so that the player can touch the prize ball. It is also applicable to, for example, an enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine (managed gaming machine) in which a gaming ball is circulated and used inside the gaming machine. Further, as the enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine, an example capable of electromagnetically recording the entry and exit of the gaming medium can be exemplified.

Further, the present invention includes a plurality of reels in which a predetermined number of symbols are arranged, controls the rotation start and rotation stop of the reels based on the operation of the player, and plays a game such as a game medal according to the winning winning combination. It can also be applied to a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) that dispenses media (including storage in a storage device). When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, instead of the handle operation detection, the operation of a bet button that can be operated by the player at the time of betting setting can be detected, and the operation of the bet button can also be performed by the player at the time of betting setting. Based on the detection of the insertion of the game medal, it is possible to apply the effect output according to the state of the game machine. Further, the present invention can be applied to, for example, a casino machine installed in a casino facility.

10 Pachinko game machines, 20 launch handles, 50 game boards, 52 game areas,
53 Main control display device, 62 1st start winning opening, 63 2nd starting winning opening,
70 1st special symbol display, 71 2nd special symbol display, 90 big prize device,
102 main board, 104 sub board, 113 first hit / fail determination means,
117 2nd hit / miss judgment means, 120 special game control means, 301 sub-main board,
302 sub-sub board, 310 touch sensor, 311 firing intensity volume 311
501 Main board CPU, 521 Sub-main board CPU.

Claims (1)

A game ball is launched into the game area, and when the game ball enters the start winning opening formed in the game area, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed, and the stopped displayed symbol is specified. It is a pachinko gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
A main control means for controlling the progress of a game including the symbol game, and
A sub-control means that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means to detect the player's contact,
It is equipped with a rotation operation detecting means for detecting the rotation operation of the player.
Some of the effects are output triggered by touch detection, which is the detection of the player's contact by the touch detection means.
The pachinko gaming machine is in a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is being executed, or a state in which either the symbol game or the special game is being executed. Has a game running state and
The game standby state includes a plurality of types of game standby states in which the output contents of the effects produced by the sub-control means are different.
Whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection, depending on which of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state. Is configured to be different,
As the starting winning opening, a first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening are provided.
An opening / closing member is attached to the second starting winning opening.
An operating port into which a game ball can enter is provided in the game area.
The opening / closing member is driven when the game ball enters the operating opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening.
In a situation where the power is restored while the touch detection means is being contacted before the power is turned on, the effect triggered by the touch detection is not output.
If a game ball enters the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening during the output of the effect triggered by the touch detection, the effect triggered by the touch detection during output is interrupted. Even if the game ball enters the operating port, the effect triggered by the touch detection during output is continued without interruption.
After the effect triggered by the touch detection is executed, the execution of the effect triggered by the touch detection is prohibited until the time counting of the predetermined time is completed after the touch detection is canceled.
In a situation where the effect triggered by the touch detection based on the touch detection is executed and the touch detection is continued, the effect triggered by the touch detection is newly performed based on the continuous touch detection. A pachinko machine that is characterized by not being executed.

Images